Prot 4e

Preface, Table of Contents
SIMATIC HMI
ProTool
Configuration Software
Introduction
Installation
Working with ProTool
Configuring with ProTool
Variables
Screens
Messages
Recipes
Functions
Users Guide
Configuring in Different
Languages
10
General Settings for the System
11
Compiling and Downloading a

Configuration to the System
12
Printing Your Configuration
13
Managing Your Configuration
14
General Communication Areas

for Non-SIMATIC PLCs
Hints on Optimization
Appendices
6AV96231AA072AB0
Release 10/97
Glossary, Index
15
16
Trademarks
SIMATIC is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the
owners rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
Impressum
Editor and Publisher: AUT91
Copyright Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved
Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the
data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungstechnik
Geschftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierung
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Technical data subject to change.

Siemens AG 1997
Order No. 6AV96231AA072AB0
Preface

The ProTool configuration software is used to configure operator panels

(OPs), touch panels (TPs) and text displays (TDs) for specific systems. The
ProTool Users Guide explains how you run ProTool and what configuration
means. The manual applies to the configuration of the following TPs and OPs
featuring graphic displays:

TP27, TP37
OP27, OP37
OP25, OP35
C7-626
Note on the C7-626:

The C7-626 is an operator panel featuring an integrated S7-CPU. It is not
explicitly mentioned in this manual. The notes on the OP25 apply to it.
How it fits in
The manual is part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation. The latter includes
the manuals for the configuration software, for touch panels (TPs) and operator panels (OPs) and for communication between the PLC and TP or OP.
You will find an overview diagram and a description below, telling when you
need the different manuals.
PC or PU
Configuration
ProTool
ProTool/Lite
Users
Guide
Users
Guide
Online
Help
TD/TP/OP
Installation
Operation
Graphics
displays
Equipment
Manuals
Textbased
displays
Equipment
Manuals
PLC
Connection
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Communication
Users
Guide
Other PLCs
Preface
Documentation
Getting Started
Brief Guide
Target Group
Beginners
Contents
This document guides you step by step through configuring
a screen containing static text
a screen containing an input/output field and bar
graph
changing from one screen to another
a message.
This document is available for
ProTool
Users Guide
Configurer
OP3, OP5, OP7, OP15, OP17

OP25, OP27, OP35, OP37
TP27, TP37
Provides information on working with the ProTool configuration software. It contains
fundamentals of configuration
a detailed description of configured objects and
functions
examples of configuring objects.
ProTool/Lite
Users Guide
Configurer
ProTool
Online Help
Configurer
This documentation applies to TPs and OPs featuring

graphics displays.
Same contents as the ProTool Users Guide. This documentation applies to TDs and OPs featuring text-based
displays.
Provides information on the computer (PU or PC)
about working on the ProToo configuration software.
The Online Help is context-sensitive and contains
a general description of the editors in ProTool
Example application
Commissioning
Instructions
Beginners
a detailed description of the different fields in the

dialog boxes
an in-depth description of the functions.
Example configurations, including the corresponding
PLC programs, are supplied with ProTool. This documentation describes how you
load examples onto the TP or OP and onto the PLC
run the examples and
can expand the interface to the PLC for your application.
ii
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Preface
Documentation
Target Group
TP27, TP37
Equipment Manual
OP27, OP37
Equipment Manual
OP25, OP35, OP45
Equipment Manual
OP7, OP17
Equipment Manual
OP5, OP15
Equipment Manual
TD17
Equipment Manual
Commissioning
engineers,
Users
OP3
Equipment Manual
Commissioning
engineers,
Users,
Programmers
Programmers
Communication
Users Guide
Contents
Describes the hardware and general operation of the
display devices. It contains
installation and commissioning
equipment description
connection of PLC, printer and configuration
computer
operating modes
operation
description of the standard screens supplied with
ProTool and their usage
installation of options
maintenance and replacement of spare parts.
Describes the hardware of the OP3, its general operation and its connection to the SIMATIC S7.
Provides information on connecting the TDs, TPs

and OPs to the following PLCs:
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC 500/505
drivers for other PLCs.
This documentation describes
the configuration and parameters required for connecting the display devices to the PLC and the network
the user data areas, which are used to exchange data
between the TD, TP or OP and the PLC.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
iii
Preface
Documentation
Other PLCs
Online Help
Target Group
Programmers
Contents
Provides information on connecting the TDs, TPs
and OPs to the PLCs such as:
Mitsubishi,
Allen Bradley,
Telemecanique.
ProAgent
Users Guide
The drivers for connecting these PLCs reside on

separate floppy disks and are referred to as NATIVE
drivers. When a driver is installed, the corresponding
online help is installed with it.
Provides the following information on the optional
package known as ProAgent (process diagnostics
for OPs):
Configurer
configuring process diagnostics for specific systems

determining process errors, troubleshooting and
remedying errors
customizing supplied diagnostic screens.
How the manual is

organized
The ProTool Users Guide is organized into the following chapters:

Chapters
13
59
1014
Contents
General information:
what is ProTool?
how is ProTool installed?
how do you run ProTool?
Basic approach to configuring with ProTool. Before you start
configuring, it is strongly recommended that you read this
chapter first.
Step-by-step instructions on configuring individual objects.
Detailed information on how you
create a configuration in different languages
compile and download your to the TP or OP
print your configuration
copy and back up your configuration.
15
Description of the data areas used by the TP or OP and

non-SIMATIC PLCs to communicate with each other.
16
Tips on optimizing a configuration.
Appendices
iv
description of the editors available in ProTool

list of all PLC jobs
description of the symbols on the toolbars
overview of system limits
list of the technical terms used in this manual.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Preface
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:

VAR_23
Variable
File Edit
F1
Background
The different issues of the Users Guide correspond to the following versions
of ProTool:
Release 07/94
Release 09/95
Release 09/96
Release 04/97
Release 10/97
Support services
Text which is displayed on the screen is shown as

typewriting. The text may comprise commands, file
names, entries in dialog boxes and system messages.
Dialog boxes and fields and buttons in dialog boxes are
shown in italic type.
Menu items are linked by an arrow. The complete path
leading to the menu item is always shown.
Names of keys are shown in a different type.
Valid for ProTool versions up to and including 1.31.

Extensions and revisions. Valid for ProTool 2.0 or higher.
Clean-up and inclusion of the OP37. Valid for ProTool 2.5
or higher.
Extensions and inclusion of TP37. The software runs under Windows95. Valid for ProTool 3.0 or higher.
Extensions and inclusion of OP27 and TP27. The software
runs under Windows95 and NT 4.0 or higher. Valid for
ProTool 4.0 or higher.
In the event of technical queries, please get in touch with your point of
contact at the Siemens branch office or agents concerned. You will find the
address in Appendix E of this manual.
Furthermore, you can contact us as follows:
Telephone
+49-911 895-7000 (Help Desk)
Fax
+49-911 895-7001 (Help by Fax)
Internet
Current
information:
Customer
Support:
TD/TP/OP
Home Page:
http://www.aut.siemens.de
http://www.aut.siemens.de/simatic-cs
http://www.siemens.de/panels
Mail box (BBS)1)
+49-911 895-7100 (SIMATIC Customer Support)
CompuServe
go: sieaut
E-Mail
Internet
CompuServe
MS Mail
simatic.support@nbgm.siemens.de
simatic support 101640,704
Hotline_Simatic#Tel7000
1) To connect to our mail box, use a modem of not more than 28,800 bauds.
Set the following parameters: 8, N, 1, ANSI or connect via ISDN.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Preface
Abbreviations
vi
The abbreviations used in the ProTool Users Guide have the following meanings:
AM
Alarm Message
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AS 511
Driver of the PU interface to the SIMATIC S5
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
CPU
Central Processing Unit
EM
Event Message
FM
Function Module
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MPI
Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7)
OLE
Object Linking and Embedding
OP
Operator Panel
PC
Personal Computer
PLC
Programmable Logic Control
PPI
Point to Point Interface (SIMATIC S7)
PU
Programming Unit
RAM
Random Access Memory (working memory)
TD
Text Display
TP
Touch Panel
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Working with ProTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3.2
Menu Bar and Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3.3
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3.4
Help Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3.5
Setting ProTools User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3.6
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Configuring with ProTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
Procedure for Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4.2
Special Features of STEP 7 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4.3
Partitioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4.4
Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
4.5
Copying to and from the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
4.6
Assigning Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4.7
Settings for the Most Important Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Defining Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5.2
Displaying Data Types on the TP or OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
5.3
Displaying Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
5.4
Controlling the Display on the TP or OP by Means of Variables . . . . . . . .
5-10
5.5
Local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
5.6
Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
5.7
Symbol Table in STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Contents
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
Text, Character Graphic and Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-8
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input/Output Fields Containing a Symbolic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-15
6-19
6.3
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
Trend Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
6-26
6-29
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
Buttons (for TPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Buttons with Freely Definable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons Featuring a Fixed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
6-33
6-37
6-39
6.6
Detecting a Called Screen on the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
7.2
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7.3
Copying Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10
7.4
Exporting and Importing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
Creating Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
8.2
8.2.1
8-7
8.2.2
Downloading Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downloading Data Records by Means of an Operator Input on the
TP or OP (Standard Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading and Uploading Data Records with a PLC Program . . . . . . .
8.3
Example of creating a recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-11
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
10
Configuring in Different Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
11
General Settings for the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
12
Compiling and Downloading a Configuration to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.1
Downloading a Configuration to the TP or OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2
12.2
Managing Configuration Data on the TP or OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-5
12.3
Troubleshooting Download Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-7
13
Printing Your Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
14
Managing Your Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14.1
Scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-2
14.2
Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-6
ii
8-7
8-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Contents
15
Creating Communication Areas for Non-SIMATIC PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
15.1
Control and Acknowledgement Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-3
15.2
Data Areas in the Interface Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-6
15.3
15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
OP Keyboard and LED Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

System Keyboard Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Function Keyboard Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
LED Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
16
Hints on Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-1
Description of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
PLC Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Toolbars in ProTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
System Limits for TPs and OPs Featuring Graphics Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Siemens Worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Glossary
Index
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
iii
Contents
iv
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Introduction
ProTool
ProTool is easy-to-use configuration software for text displays (TDs), operator panels (OPs) and touch panels (TPs). The software can be run under
Windows95 and Windows NT 4.0 or higher. Most of the steps which have
to be performed in ProTool can be done by using either a mouse or a keyboard.
Configure
Configuration consists in creating screens and messages and linking them to

the PLC program. This means that the sequence of events on the PLC can be
visualized and manipulated.
Screens
Screens are used to create an image of the process. This means that the operator can quickly grasp the relationships and intervene in the process, should
this be necessary. Text explains individual elements on the screen. Graphics,
such as trends and bar graphs, display trend patterns for example, of temperatures or of current fill levels. Screens have to be called. Screens display
values from the PLC. The operator can also enter values, which are then
transferred to the PLC.
Messages
Messages draw the operators attention to certain operating states or display

malfunctions in process execution. Messages are displayed automatically.
Keys
Operator panels have a system keypad and a function keypad. The system
keypad features keys for operating an OP such as cursor control or inputs.
Functions can be assigned to function keys in the configuration. By that the
control sequence is implemented.
Touch panels are operated by touching touch-sensitive elements directly on
the screen of the display device. You set the number, properties and the actions triggered by these operating elements when you configure with ProTool.
Components of a
configuration
A configuration consists of different components. The components include:
setting the PLC and the type of connection

general settings for the TP or OP
objects such as variables, screens, messages.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
1-1
Introduction
Configuration data
The configuration is performed on a PU or PC in ProTool. Following

configuration, you have to compile your configuration and download it to the
TP or OP. If the TP or OP is connected to the PLC, the current values are
displayed. The figure shows the different phases in which work is performed
with configuration data.
Configuration phase
Download phase
PC or PU
TP or OP
ProTool
Configuration
data
Process control phase
Configuration
data
DISPLAY
Connection
PLC
Object types and

objects
Different types of editor are integrated in ProTool for configuring different

object types. Every object is stored under a symbolic name and referenced.
Printing your
configuration
Part or all of the configuration can be printed with ProTool. Part means that
all the objects of a single type, such as messages or variables, are printed.
1-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Installation
System
requirements
ProTool can run under the operating systems Windows95 and Windows
NT 4.0 or higher. The table shows the recommended system requirements.
Configuration
Installation
methods
Recommendation
CPU
Pentium
Main memory
32 MB
Free space on hard disk for ProTool
60 MB
Drive (for installation)
CD-ROM
You can install ProTool either
directly from the CD or

from hard disk or
from floppy disks
STEP 7 integration
Should you have the STEP 7 3.1 or higher programming software on your
computer, you can install ProToo integrated in STEP 7. The advantages of
this are as follows:
You manage ProTool projects with SIMATIC Manager; in other words,

you use the same management tool as you do for your STEP 7 projects.
You can use STEP 7 symbols and data blocks from a symbol table as variables. The data type and the address are entered automatically.
ProTool lists all the PLCs in your STEP 7 project and determines the appropriate parameters once you have selected a PLC.
Selecting
languages
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
The installation prompts you for the options and languages you want to install. If you install several languages simultaneously, you can subsequently
modify the ProTool language using the installation program without having
to reinstall ProTool. You determine during installation the language which
you want to be active when you have finished installing.
2-1
Installation
Installable
components
The size of the installation can be varied by means of options. With the options available, the following components are installed:
ProTool
is the program for creating configurations
OP firmware
is the firmware for the TP or OP. It is essential that you specify this option
upon initial installation.
Optional PLC drivers

are drivers and examples for non-SIMATIC PLCs which you can order
separately
Optional functions
are functions that you can load and order separately
Optional devices
are additional software that can be loaded for customized TPs or OPs
Installing from CD
When installing ProTool, proceed as follows:

Step
2-2
Action
Launch Windows.
Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Select in Explorer the CD-ROM drive and double-click the

setup.exe program.
A dialog box appears in which by choosing Options you can

click the packages you wish to install. Do not change any settings here unless you have ordered optional packages.
If you have installed STEP 7, you can select under STEP 7

whether you want to install ProTool as Integrated or
Stand-alone.
Follow Setups instructions on the screen.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Installation
Installing from
hard disk
Before you can install ProTool from hard disk, you must first copy the following directories and their subdirectories from the CD to hard disk:
\PROTOOL
\FIRMWARE
Installing from
floppy disks
To be able to install ProTool from floppy disks, you must first copy subdirectories DISK1 to DISKn of the following directories from the CD to separate
floppy disks:
\PROTOOL
\FIRMWARE
Start installation with floppy disk DISK1 from the ProTool directory.
Launching ProTool
Following installation, you will find ProTool in the Startup menu in the
Simatic folder. The following icons are available:
Launching ProTool
Call late breaking information on ProTool.
Call online Help.

You can also call online help from ProTool by pressing F1.
Modify ProTool Setup.
You can modify Setup, for example, to:
change the language
install options
switch between ProTool Integrated and Stand-alone.
Note
Before you start work on a configuration, you should first read Chapter 14
about the file structure created for ProTool and the significance of the standard screens.
Uninstalling
ProTool
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
By choosing Settings Control Panel Software from the Windows menu,

you can delete ProTool and any options you may have installed from the list
of installed software.
2-3
Installation
2-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Condition
This chapter describes how you run ProTool. The description does not replace
the general documentation for Windows.
Philosophy of
working with
ProTool
ProTool is primarily designed for working with a mouse. The different editors
are provided with special toolbars that have editor-specific buttons. These toolbars are shortcuts to frequently used functions.
You can configure ProTool to a large extent, however, using the keyboard.
Working without a
mouse
If you work without a mouse, the same keyboard conventions apply in ProTool
as in Windows. The table shows the key combinations for fine tuning of fields
on screens.
Key combinations
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Functions
Message editor:
SHIFT + LEFT
SHIFT + RIGHT
CTRL + DOWN/UP
Select one character left

Select one character right
Next/previous configured message
Character graphics field:

CTRL + ARROW
Display line strokes
Move fields on screens:

LEFT/RIGHT
UP/DOWN
Move field left/right

Move field up/down
Zoom in on fields on screens:

CTRL + LEFT
CTRL + RIGHT
CTRL + DOWN
CTRL + UP
Zoom in horizontally left on field

Zoom in horizontally right on field
Zoom in vertically down on field
Zoom in vertically up on field
Zoom out of fields on screens:

SHIFT + CTRL + LEFT
SHIFT + CTRL + RIGHT
SHIFT + CTRL + DOWN
SHIFT + CTRL + UP
Zoom out horizontally left from field

Zoom out horizontally right from field
Zoom out vertically down from field
Zoom out vertically up from field
3-1
To configure
3-2
you can open as many as three configurations and several editors simultaneously in ProTool. In this way you can copy, for example, data from one configuration to another (refer also to Section 4.5). This makes work easier for
you, since you do not have to reconfigure all the data. The figure shows
ProTool with several open windows.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
3.1
Using Online Help
Purpose
Online Help is a complete reference for ProTool which you can call at any time
while you are configuring by pressing F1 or SHIFT + F1.
Keys
Type of Help
F1
Help on selected dialog window.
SHIFT F1
Help on a selected element (button, input field etc.)

in the active dialog window.
or
The figure shows an online Help window:
Text-based displays
This icon signifies that the explanations you find in online Help refer to
devices featuring text-based displays.
Graphics displays
This icon signifies that the explanations you find in online Help refer to
devices featuring graphics displays.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
3-3
Jumps in online
Help
Buttons are hidden beneath many elements in the dialog boxes of ProTool online Help. When you point to a jump, the shape of the mouse pointer changes
to a hand. If you click a jump, you go to other topics or call a secondary window. You will obtain further information in this superimposed window.
Displaying jumps
To make jumps visible in the online Help, press the following keys simultaneously:
Keys
3.2
Functions
CTRL +TAB
All invisible jumps are displayed.
TAB
First invisible jumps are displayed.
SHIFT + TAB
Unhide previous jump.
RETURN
Execute jump.
Menu Bar and Tool Bar
Menu bar
There are various editing levels in configuring. These editing levels are displayed by means of main menu items on the menu bar:
Main menu items
All the editing steps at a given editing level are grouped under a main menu
item. The main menu items are specifically:
3-4
File
All the editing steps relating to the overall configuration are

grouped here. You can, for example, open, save, generate and
transfer files to the OP or TP, etc.
Edit
All the editing steps relating to selected sections of the configuration are grouped under this main menu item. Here you
can cut, copy, paste etc. fields or text, for example.
Editors!
The project window is opened. All the editors you use to

configure your TP or OP are grouped here. Here you select
the editor you want to work with for example, screens,
event messages etc.
System
General settings for the TP or OP are grouped under this

main menu item. Here you set the structure of the display, the
link to the PLC program and PLC-specific settings etc.
Options
Here you can modify the default setting for the prefixes of
object types, enable and disable the Are You Sure? prompt
before Delete, open the cross-reference window and modify
OLE settings.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Editor-dependent
menu items
Toolbar
Window
All the editing steps with which the windows of ProTool are
arranged will be found here. You can select, for example, the
window you want to have on top, or you can arrange all open
windows on the screen etc.
Help
Choose help to go to online Help.
Editor-dependent menu items appear only after the corresponding editor has
been called. These menu items contain all the editing steps specific to that editor. The following menu items are involved:
Screen
You can, for example, select screen attributes, create fields,

display palettes etc.
Messages
By choosing messages, you can , for example, edit variables

or information text, display additional windows etc.
Some functions cannot be accessed via the menu; instead you can access them
directly on the toolbar beneath the menu bar. The buttons are self-explanatory
and represent shortcuts compared to the menu.
The functions from which you can select depend on the editor you choose. You
can position the toolbars anywhere on the screen. You will find an overview of
all the buttons available in ProTool in Appendix C of this manual.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
3-5
3.3
Status Bar
Status bar
The status bar is at the bottom of the screen. In ProTool, the status bar displays
general and editor-specific details. General details are, for example, the TP or
OP which has selected, or how you can call online Help. Editor-specific details
are, for example, the language and the assignment of the message in the area
pointer. The figure shows part of the status bar for messages:
Displaying
information
In the status bar, you can also display information about the functions of jumps
or menu items. To do so, click on the item you require and hold down the
mouse button. While you are doing this, the corresponding information is displayed in the status bar. If you do not want to trigger the function, continue to
hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse away from the topic you selected.
3.4
Help Functions
Overview
ProTool contains functions which provide information on the entire configuration. The different items are listed below:
File Project
Information
Choose this item and you will find general information about the project for
example, the device type, date created, modified and compiled etc.
File Download
After the connection has been established to the TP or OP, you learn the name
of the configuration loaded on the TP or OP.
SystemMemory
Requirements
Following a download operation, the following information is displayed:
the memory required by the configuration on the TP or OP

the amount of memory still available on the TP or OP following completion of the download operation, and
when the configuration was last downloaded.

Options
Cross-reference
3-6
The objects which refer to each other are displayed when you choose this
item. If, for example, you wish to delete a variable used in a field, you learn
about the corresponding field by means of the cross-reference. Double-clicking on the specified field branches ProTool directly to that field.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
3.5
Setting ProTools User Interface
Purpose
ProTools user interface can be customized for example, by arranging windows or displaying and hiding toolbars etc. You will find options for setting
ProTools user interface by choosing the following items from the menu:
Screen User
Interface
You can set here the way you want your the user interface to be displayed on
your screen for example, with or without a grid, as dots or as a grating. For
touch panels, you can display and hide the touch grid.
Screen Reference
Text
The screen in the reference language is displayed as the active screen. Press
the Apply button on the reference screen to apply all text from the reference
screen to the active screen.
Screen Zoom
Zoom in or out of the display on the screen or adapt the screen area to the
window size.
Screen
Monochrome
With an OP25 configuration, the display on the screen is switched between

Monochrome and Color.
Messages Attribute
Window
Choose this item from the menu to hide and display the attribute window. In
this window, you set different options which apply to a single message. This
might be its priority, for example.
Messages Reference
Text
This menu item displays and hides the reference text window. This window
displays message text in the reference language.
Options Default
Setting
You can modify the default settings of names and the settings of objects in
your configuration.
Options OLE
Settings
here you select the programs which you wish to use for creating or editing
graphics.
Window Status Bar
You use this menu item to display and hide the status bar.
Window Keyboard
You use this menu item to display and hide the language-dependent keyboard
assignment on the screen.
Window Toolbars...
Here you select the toolbars which you wish to display and hide (refer also to
Appendix C. You can position the toolbars anywhere on the screen.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
3-7
3.6
Dialog Boxes
Settings
If you select a dialog box, only all the essential settings are visible initially.
Optional settings can be accessed by clicking on a button. Clicking a button
opens a further dialog box, which may contain further buttons.
An example of the structure of a dialog box is shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1
Branching to Other
Dialog Boxes
Bar Dialog Box
If there is an ellipsis after the name of a button (for example, Figure 3-1: Edit),
ProTool branches to another dialog box when you click the button.
If there is a check box in front of the label of a button, you branch to an optional setting on clicking the button (for example, Figure 3-1: Y Axis). You can
tell from the check box whether a default setting has been modified (checked
box) or not (unchecked box).
3-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Device type
You configure the different OPs in basically the same manner. Before you
start work on your configuration, you must set the device type for example,
TP37. You are now presented with functions which are available on this type
of display device only. The type of display device cannot be changed for this
configuration once it has been set.
If you choose File Convert from the menu, you can convert, for example,
a configuration created for an OP35 so that it can run on the OP37.
Display
The display on the TP or OP can be customized. This refers to the location

and size of the different windows in which screens and messages are displayed. The display format applies to the whole configuration. ProTool specifies a default setting.
Object types
The items you configure are different objects. We distinguish between different types of objects, such as messages, screens, variables, etc. A separate
editor is available for every object type.
Variables
Variables are used to establish the link to the PLC. Variables are used on
screens and in messages to read values from the PLC and display them on the
TP or OP. Similarly, variables can be used to write values to the PLC.
Information text
Information text can be configured to provide additional information about

inputs and messages.
General settings
General settings for the system and the communication areas on the PLC
have to be performed centrally.
Compile, Download
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
When completed, the configuration is downloaded to the TP or OP. In this

procedure, the configuration is first compiled. Compile means that a file is
created that can be read by the TP or OP. This file is then downloaded to the
TP or OP.
4-1
4.1
Procedure for Configuring
Introduction
A configuration has to be created step by step. Certain steps are mandatory,

others are optional.
The different configuration steps are described below in the order in which
you perform them. This is followed by a list of the settings required for configuring the different functions.
Required details
Figure 4-1 shows the basic details that have to be provided for the TP or OP
and the PLC in your configuration. The details include
type of TP or OP
screen partitioning
PLC to which the TP or OP is connected
driver which the two will use to communicate with each other
communication areas
Configuration
Hardware
and
driver
Type of TP
or OP
General
settings
Screen
partitioning
Process
visualization
Objects
Figure 4-1
Objects
4-2
TP or OP specific
components
PLC-specific
components
Communication
PLC
Communication
data areas
Addresses
Basic Structure of a Configuration
The actual visualization of a process is performed by using objects, such as

screens and messages. These objects are supplied with current values form
the PLC. The specific values concerned are set by means of addresses.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Procedure
You create your configuration on a PC or PU and then download it to the

PLC. The procedure for configuration is specifically as described in the following
Step
1
Action
Set device type
Open a new configuration by choosing File New from
the menu.
After you have opened a new configuration, the Device Selection
dialog box appears. At this point you set the device type for
example, OP37. The other items displayed by ProTool thereafter
are device-specific.
Set display partitioning

You set the partitioning of the display by choosing the command
System Screen/Keys from the menu. The Screen/Keys dialog
box is opened. The settings you perform here apply to the whole
configuration. There is default setting. Check whether the default
setting applies to your configuration. If not, modify the default
setting to suit your requirements.
Set PLC and communication driver

Choose System PLC from the menu to set the PLC to which
the TP or OP is connected and the driver which the TP or OP will
use to communicate with each other. All the settings you perform
in the PLC dialog box are stored under a symbolic PLC name. If
you use a variable in an object, specify this symbolic name for
the connection to the PLC.
Enter communication areas (area pointers)

For the TP or OP to be able to communicate with each other, you
have to define common data areas. These data areas are known
as communication areas. You enter them by choosing System
Area Pointers from the menu. The communication areas you enter will depend on the types of object that are being configured.
Table 11-1 shows the dependencies
For the SIMATIC S5, you have to create the interface area under
Area Pointers. A detailed description of the interface area will be
found in the Communication Users Guide.
Configure objects
Now configure messages, screens, and recipes, depending on the
requirements of your process.
Variables enabling the connection to the PLC can be created either directly using the editor Variables or you can wait until you
configure the different objects. If, for example, you create an
input field on a screen, you can open the Edit dialog box for
creating variables.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-3
Step
6
Action
Compile configuration
For your configuration to run on the TP or OP, it first has to be
compiled by choosing File Compile from the menu.
During compilation, a check is made for inconsistencies in the
configuration. One inconsistency might be, for example, that a
communication area has not been created for a configured object
type.
Download configuration to TP or OP
Download your configuration to the TP or OP by choosing File
Download from the menu. If a current, compiled version
exists already, it is downloaded. If a compiled version does not
exist, the configuration is first compiled and then downloaded.
Example of an
OP37 connected to
an SIMATIC S5
Step
Action
Open in ProTool the file called OP37_S5.pdb located in

the \protool\standard directory and save the file
under a new name.
Choose System PLC from the menu and set SIMATIC S5,
and click the Edit button.
From the Driver dialog box, select SIMATIC S5-AS511 and

click on the Parameters button.
Select from the SIMATIC S5-AS511 dialog box the CPU Type S5
115U CPU944, for example, and confirm all inputs by clicking
OK.
Exit from the PLC dialog box by clicking the Close button in
order to apply all settings.
Choose System Area Pointers from the menu to configure the

DB-TDOP interface area. It is already selected in the Type field.
Press the Add button.
Enter the following values in the Interface Area dialog box: DB:
51, Length: 255.
Confirm with OK. This makes DB51 the interface area.
4-4
Then partition the OPs display by choosing System Screen/

Keys from the menu.
Select for Alarm/Event Mess. the setting Window/Window, to enable both event messages and alarm messages to be displayed on
screens simultaneously.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Step
Overwriting an
earlier
configuration
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Action
10
Choose Active and then the Message Area and position it, while
holding down the mouse button, in the screen layout. This concludes partitioning of the OP display.
11
Configure a screen (refer to Chapter 6).
12
Save the file by choosing File Save from the menu.
13
Compile your configuration by choosing

File Compile from the menu.
14
Connect the OP37 and to your PC or PU. Choose File

Download from the menu to download your configuration
to the OP37.
If you want to overwrite a configuration on the TP or OP which created with

an earlier version of ProTool, delete the flash memory on the memory card
on the TP or OP before you do so. If you do not, the TP or OP may not start
up properly.
4-5
4.2
Special Features of STEP 7 Integration
STEP 7 integration
If you have installed ProToo integrated in STEP 7, you can access the same
database with ProTool as the engineering tools of STEP 7. Your assign your
symbols once only and use them everywhere. This saves you from entering
them more than once.
The communication parameters of the PLC are applied directly to your configuration. When you configure variables and areas pointers, you access
STEP 7s text or graphic list.
Calling ProTool
Step
Action
Launch SIMATIC Manager.
Select an S7 project or create a new one.
Choose Insert Hardware SIMATIC OP from the menu.

ProTool project OP1 is created.
Double-click OP1. This launches ProToo.
You can copy, move and delete the ProTool project in SIMATIC Manager.
Selecting a PLC
Select the PLC as you normally would do. All the networks, CPUs and FMs
available in the STEP 7 project are displayed for the parameters in the
SIMATIC S7 - 300/400 dialog box (Figure 4-2). After you have selected the
network and the CPU by means of symbolic names parameters and addresses
are entered automatically.
You can select the CPU symbolically only if you have placed it in an S7
station, assigned parameters to it and networked it using SIMATIC Manager.
4-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Figure 4-2
SIMATIC S7 300/400 Dialog Box
If you have not created the STEP 7 configuration so far, you can enter the
parameters manually. To do this, select Define Parameters Manually.
Using the symbol
table
When you configure variables, the STEP 7 symbol table is displayed. If you
click a symbolic name, the name and the full address are applied automatically to the configuration (Figure 4-3).
Figure 4-3
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variable Dialog Box with Integrated STEP 7 Symbol Table
4-7
Updating
Symbol tables and address parameters are constantly updated by means of the
symbolic link. Modifications to STEP 7 are applied immediately.
File menu
Choose File New, File Open and File Save as... in ProTool to open
STEP 7 dialog boxes. Figure 4-4 shows an example of the New dialog box.
Figure 4-4
New Dialog Box
You can create new ProToo projects in this dialog box. You can recognize
ProTool projects by the symbol in front of them:
The dialog boxes for Open and Save As... look identical. The y differ only in
their function.
With Open, select from the Object Name entry field an existing ProToo project. When you create a new project, you can enter a new name of not more
than twenty-four characters at this point.
Integrating
projects
4-8
Projects created as Stand-alone cannot be called directly from SIMATIC

Manager. To embed projects of this type in a STEP 7 project, they have to be
integrated. To do this, choose in ProToo File Integrate from the menu.
Rename the ProTool project in the STEP 7 configuration so that the name is
different from that in the original project.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Using integrated
projects as
stand-alone
projects
Projects created as integrated projects may be copied ans used in ProTool as

stand-alone projects. To use them in this way, select the project you wish to
copy in SIMATIC Manager. Choose Properties to learn the path name in the
file system. Copy the *.pdb file using Windows Explorer to the destination
directory and rename the file, if necessary.
ProTool
Stand-alone
You can still launch ProTool as a stand-alone program by calling ProTool

Setup and selecting ProTool Stand-alone. If you want to modify this setting
in Setup, ProTool is not reinstalled; instead, only the link to STEP 7 is canceled.
Example of
creating a ProTool
project
In this example, you create a ProTool project and prepare the connection to
the S7 PLC.
Step
Action
Create the new STEP 7 project called GETSTART in SIMATIC

Manager.
Select the GETSTART project and choose Insert Hardware SIMATIC S7-300 Station from the menu. The SIMATIC
S7-300 Station 1 folder appears.
Note:
If the folder for an MPI network does not appear when you create
the GETSTART project, choose Insert Subnet MPI Network
from the menu.
Configure the SIMATIC S7-300 with the CPU 314.
Choose Properties CPU 314 from the menu and click the MPI
button on the General card.
The Properties MPI Node dialog box is opened.
Activate the Node Connected with Selected Network list box.

The entry MPI Network 1 is selected.
Close all dialog boxes by clicking OK or by saving. Thus you

have created and networked the PLC tot he extent that this is
required by ProTool. The blank STEP 7 symbol table was created
automatically.
Open the Symbols symbol table in the GETSTART\SIMATIC

S7-300 Station1\CPU314\S7 Program1 folder by choosing Edit
Open Object from the menu and making the following entry:
Symbol:
Address:
Mixer1
E0.1
The BOOL data type is entered automatically.

8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Save and close the symbol table. You can use the Mixer1 symbol
later to configure a variable.
4-9
Step
Action
Open the ProTool project. It contains the standard configurations

supplied with ProTool. Copy the OP27_S7 object to your
GETSTART project.
10
Double-click Copy OP27_S7. ProTool is started and the default

configuration is opened.
11
Choose System PLC from the menu. The PLC dialog box is
opened. With STEP 7 integration, the default setting here is the
SIMATIC S7-300/400 PLC.
12
Choose Edit Parameters from the menu. The SIMATIC S7300/400 dialog box appears.
13
From the Connect OP with Network list box, select the entry MPI
Network 1. This entry now appears in the Select Communication
Peer selection box.
14
Select from the selection box the entry MPI Network 1\CPU314
(S7 Program1) and close all dialog boxes dealing with the PLC
by clicking OK or Save. The connection between the OP and the
PLC is thus established.
15
Double-click on Variable in the editor window. The Variable

dialog box appears.
16
Select PLC_1 from the PLC list box. In the Symbol list box, you
will now see the Mixer1 symbol from the STEP 7 symbol table.
Double-click this symbol. The following values are applied to the
dialog box:
Mixer 1
BOOL
E
0
1
4-10
in the Name entry field

in the Type list box
in the Area list box
in the E entry field
in the Bit entry field
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4.3
Partitioning the Display
Adjustable areas
You can partition the screen on the TP or OP into different areas. On the one
hand, there are the different areas for displaying screens and messages. On
the other hand, there is the area for the
Soft keys (OP)

Icons can be displayed at the border of the screen for the soft keys.
Buttons (TP).
Setting
The areas are selected by choosing from the menu

System Screen/Keys
The settings you perform here apply to the whole configuration. Therefore,
define the areas before you start work on the configuration.
Some areas can be enabled and disabled, and their size and location can be
modified. Many areas are permanently assigned. Table 4-1 lists all the areas
possible and the extent to which they can be modified.
Table 4-1
Settable Areas for the Display
Area
Enable/Disable
Modify
Size
Location
Basic area
No
No
No
Fixed window
Yes
Yes
No
Event message window
Yes
No
Yes
Alarm message window
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes2)
Yes
Yes3)
No
Yes
Message
line1)
Message indicator
1)
TP27, TP37: event message line only

OP25, OP27, TP27: can be switched between single-line and double-line
3) TP27, TP37: cannot be disabled
2)
All the other areas, such as the system message window, Help window, date
and time window and setpoint inputs, cannot be configured.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-11
Example for OP27
Figure 4-5 shows an example of how the display on the OP27 might be partitioned. The fixed window located at the top border of the screen might contain the date and time, which should always be displayed. The event message
area is partially superimposed on the fixed window. When the event message
window is called on the OP, the date and time are less important. Current
process data, however, should still be visible to the extent possible. The message indicator should point out that at least one more alarm message is waiting to be serviced on the OP. Icons have been assigned to the six soft keys on
the bottom border of the screen.
Fixed window
Message indicator
Main area
Soft key assignment

Figure 4-5
Example of Partitioning the Display on the OP27
Significance
The different areas have the following significance:
Basic area
The main area is the lowest level and extends over the whole screen. All
other areas are superimposed on parts of the basic area. The location and size
of the basic area cannot be modified. Screens are configured in the basic
area. This means that the contents of the basic area depends on the screen
you call.
Fixed window
The fixed window is a window that is permanently open. It occupies part of

the basic area. The fixed window can be enabled/disabled by choosing
Screen/Keys from the menu. If it is enabled, it is displayed while screens are
being configured, thus reducing the available area for screens. You can adjust
the size of the fixed window; it is permanently located at the top border of
the screen. You configure the fixed window with the screen editor.
4-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Alarm message
window
The alarm message window is the window in which alarm messages appear.
The window is opened only when an alarm message is issued. The window
disappears when the alarm message is acknowledged.
The size and the location of the alarm message window cannot be configured. It is sized automatically with the event message window.
The display of alarm messages cannot be disabled. Either an alarm message
area or a message line has to be configured.
Event message
window
The event message window is the window in which event messages appear.
The window is opened only if it is called. The event message window can be
enabled and disabled by choosing Screen/Keys. You can set the height of the
window, depending on the device type, between single-line and double-line.
Its location can also be changed.
Message line
The message line is the area in which alarm messages and event messages
are displayed. On touch panels, only event messages are displayed on the
message line. The message line can be enabled and disabled by choosing
Screen/Keys. You can set the height of the message line, depending on the
device type, between single-line and double-line. Its location can also be
changed.
Message indicator
The message indicator is a symbol which draws your attention to alarm messages queued at the TP or OP. The message indicator can be enabled and disabled for operator panels by choosing Screen/Keys from the menu. Its size
cannot be modified, but you can change its location. You can operate the
message indicator on the TP.
Dynamic position
On the OP35 and the OP37, the message window and the information text
window are positioned dynamically as a function of the cursor position in
order not to conceal input fields which are in the process of being edited.
This function cannot be enabled and disabled by choosing Screen/Keys.
Icons (OP only)
You can place icons on the screen for screen-specific keys (soft keys). You
can do this only for Fx keys which are arranged directly around the screen.
Choose Screen/Keys to perform global settings applicable to all screens. The
icons appear on every configured screen in so far as the settings cannot be
overwritten later by every individual screen. The changes then apply only to
the screen concerned.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-13
Settings for
messages
You can set the following combinations for the display of alarm messages
and event messages:
Window/Window
Event messages and alarm messages are displayed in separate
message windows.

The alarm message window is

opened automatically when an
alarm message arrives.
Window/Line
An event message is displayed
on the message line, whereas an
alarm message is displayed in
the message window. The message line is always visible. The
alarm message window is
opened immediately when an
alarm message is issued.
Message line
Window/Off
An alarm message is displayed
in the message window. Event
messages are not displayed.
Line/Line (OPs only)
Message line
An alarm message or an event

message is displayed on the message line. The message line is always visible. If no message is
waiting, the standby message is
displayed, if configured.
4-14
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Priorities
Screen areas have different priorities. This is noticeable when the areas are
cascaded. The high-priority area is superimposed on the low-priority area. In
this way, an alarm message window is superposed on soft keys and buttons,
and an open event message window.
The following matrix tells you which areas are superposed when cascading is
effective. This means that you can avoid in the configuration phase already
that messages on the TP or OP are superposed on important buttons or icons.
Window
Superposed
Basic area
Fixed
window
EM window AM
window
Message
line
Message
indicator
Soft key/
button
Basic
area
Fixed
window
EM window
AM window
Message line
Message
indicator
Soft key/
button
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-15
4.4
Editors
Editors in ProTool
ProTool provides various editors for the different types of object. They are:
Screens
event messages
alarm messages
variables
recipes
trends
text or graphic lists
graphic objects
Figure 4-6 shows the project window for selecting editors and objects.
Figure 4-6
Symbolic name
The Project Window in ProTool
Objects such as screens, variables and text or graphic lists are stored under a
symbolic name. The symbolic name is valid only for that configuration. You
have to specify this symbolic name whenever you create, delete and edit objects or reference objects from within other objects. Symbolic object names
are displayed under Objects in the project window.
Symbolic object names may have default settings and may be numbered automatically. The default settings may be entered by choosing Options
Default Setting from the menu. Default settings were performed before
ProTool was shipped.
4-16
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Object types
The user interface of the different editors has been adapted to the specific
configuration of the various types of object. Detailed descriptions of the
different object types will be found elsewhere in this manual. Only a brief
summary is presented in the following.
Screens
A screen may consist of static text, a representation of values, graphics and

graphic characters. Values can be displayed as
numbers
text
graphics
bar graphs
trend.
Values are always based on variables, which define the link to the PLC. The
TD or OP reads the process value from the PLC and displays in the configured format. In the case of inputs, a value is sent to the PLC. Figure 4-7
shows a configured screen featuring output fields, bar graphs and icons for
soft keys.
Figure 4-7
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Configured Screen for the Screens Editor (Shown here for the OP37)
4-17
Event messages
and alarm
messages
Event messages and alarm messages are used to display operating states and
malfunctions in a process. In event messages and alarm messages, values as
well as static text can be output (Figure 4-8).
Figure 4-8
Variables
Configured Alarm Messages
Variables represent the link to the PLC. They contain the address in the memory area of the PLC. From these addresses, the TP/OP reads values or it
writes values.
The Variable dialog box is PLC-specific. Depending on the PLC that you set,
the appropriate data types and addresses are made available. An example of a
variable configured for a SIMATIC S5 is shown in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9
4-18
Variable Configured for a SIMATIC S5
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Recipes are groups of technologically associated PLC setpoints for a specific

application. Data are assigned to the configured data structure on the TP or
OP.
Trends
Trends are used to visualize data for example, samples from the PLC in
the form of lines, dots or bar graphs.
Text or graphic lists
Text or graphic lists are used for the dynamic display of text and graphics. On
text or graphic lists, you assign different pieces of text or graphics to the values of a variable. The text or graphic is then output to the TP or OP instead
of the value.
Graphics
Graphics are used either directly on the screen or
assigned as fixed-size icons tot he soft keys on the OP

used as bitmaps for labeling buttons on TPs.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-19
4.5
Copying to and from the Clipboard
Cut, copy, paste
You can cut selected parts of your configuration, or copy them to and paste
them from the Clipboard, in the different ProTool editors. For example, you
can copy text and fields from the alarm message editor to the event message
editor and copy graphic elements from one screen to another.
Project window
You can copy from one project to another via the ProTool project window
(Figure 4-6). Select the object you want to copy under Objects (multiple selections are also possible) and drag it with the mouse button held down to the
project window of the target configuration.
A condition for copying from one project to another is that the system limits
of the target configuration are not exceeded. The system limits for the TP or
OP featuring graphics displays are listed in Appendix D of this manual.
You can edit the names of objects. To edit the names of objects, click twice
(do not double-click) the objects name on the object list. Objects that cannot
be edited for example, Z_PRINTER are grayed.
With these two buttons, you can change single-column display of the object list to multiple-column display and back
again.
Paste,
Paste Special
There are two ways in which you can paste objects from the Clipboard to the
target configuration:
S Edit Paste option

The object is pasted from the Clipboard to the target configuration. If
there is already an object of that name in the configuration, the object is
pasted with a new name.
S Edit Paste Special option

Only different objects are pasted. If there is already an identical object of
the same name in the target configuration, it is used. If there is already an
object which has the same name but is not identical, the object is pasted
from the Clipboard under a different name. You can use this option,
for example, to compare the target configuration with the source configuration.
Renaming
If there is already an object of the same name in the target configuration, the
object you want to paste may have to be renamed. It is given the next unassigned name available in the target configuration.
Example:
Variable VAR_4 is renamed as VAR_11 if variables VAR_1 through VAR_10
exist already in the target configuration.
4-20
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Preparing for a
new configuration
What is copied?
Before you start copying objects from an existing configuration, it is essential

that you perform the following global settings in the new configuration. In
this way you make sure that data are not lost during copying on account of
different settings.
Match the partitioning of your screen display with that of the source configuration by choosing System Screen/Keys from the menu (Section 4.3).
Match the name and the driver of the PLC with those of the source configuration by choosing System PLC.
You can copy the following to the Clipboard:
all objects listed in the project window for example, screens, text or
graphic lists, variables etc.
objects from screens (trends, fields, graphics etc.) in the screen editor
messages and objects from messages (message text, fields, information
text etc.) in the message editor.
An objects attributes and all the referenced objects are copied with the object. Special occurrences during copying are sent to the status window. Here
you obtain information on the objects which have been copied or renamed,
for example.
What is not
copied?
Undo
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
These objects are not copied.

Unknown objects in the target configuration for example, functions or
buttons when copying from TP to OP
Area pointers
Character sets
With multilingual objects, only the languages in the target configuration
are taken into account. New languages are not created.
Choose Edit Undo from the menu to undo the last access to the Clipboard
(delete, paste etc.) performed from the project window.
4-21
Degree of copying
and conversions
Table 4-2 shows the degree of copying and any conversions which may have
been made to the different objects. Columns 1) to 4) have the following meanings:
1) Copying to and from devices featuring text-based and graphics displays
is possible.
2) Selections can be made from the project window
3) Copying through usage in other objects is possible
4) Direct copying in the corresponding editor is possible
Table 4-2
Degree of Copying and Conversions When Copying to Another Project
Object and Degree of Copying
1)
Conversion
3)
4)

Screens
The following are not copied:
Screen elements located outside the target display when display sizes are not identical
References to other screens for example, via
the Select Screen function. A dummy is created
in the target configuration in its place.
Identification as start screen
Fixed window
Fields/entries
Soft keys
Attributes (color, function etc.)
Dynamic attributes
Languages
Buttons
Multiplex lists
2)
The number of fields is specified by the destination device.

Existing screen numbers are re-created. Make sure
that functions referring to these screen numbers
for example, Select Screen) do not use wrong
screens.
Messages
Fields
Information text
Attributes (priority, Print
Screen etc.)
Functions
Languages
Variables
Limit values
Functions
Attributes
Address
PLC
Array variables
Recipes
Variables
Attributes
Parameters
PLC
4-22
Message and information text are truncated to the

format of the destination device, if necessary.

The number of fields is specified by the destination device.

Symbolic fields on text-based displays are converted into numeric fields for graphics displays.
Attributes not defined in the target configuration
for example, identifications for text-based displays
are not copied.

If the PLC cannot be created (see PLCs) or a compatible PLC does not exist, the variables are isolated from the PLC. The addresses are lost in the
process.
Existing recipe numbers are re-created. Make sure
that functions referring to these recipe numbers do
not use wrong recipes.

ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Table 4-2
Degree of Copying and Conversions When Copying to Another Project
Object and Degree of Copying

Text or graphic lists
Conversion
Copying from graphics displays to text-based displays:
Graphic objects
Text
Languages
1)
2) 3)
4)

Graphic lists are not copied

Range of values of text lists is converted
System lists for example, Z_OP_PRINTER) are
copied only if they are not present in the target
configuration.
Icon sizes are adapted to the layout of the destination device.

Existing trigger bits are re-created. Make sure that

functions referring to these trigger bits do not use
the wrong trends.

Functions
Functions not defined on the destination device are

not copied. If parameters are not within the permissible range of values, they are set to their default settings.

PLCs
PLCs are not converted. If a PLC does not exist in

the target configuration, an attempt is made to
create it or to use a compatible PLC. If the attempt
is unsuccessful, the objects concerned loose their
links to the PLC.

Graphic objects
Attributes
Trends
Attributes
Variables
Multiplex lists
STEP 7 symbols
If an MPI address has been assigned, the next unassigned address is inserted.
Function keys
Attributes for example, password level
Variables
Functions
Graphic objects
Dummy screen
Global function keys are not copied. Soft keys are

copied only with whole screens.
In the case of different device layouts, function

keys are accepted on account of their position on
the device. Superfluous keys are not copied.
If the objet you wish to copy refers to a screen that does not exist in the target
configuration, a blank dummy screen is created in its place as WYSIWYG in
the target configuration. In this way, you do not inadvertently copy the whole
source configuration with the start screen.
If you later paste a screen via the Clipboard, the dummy screen in the target
configuration is automatically replaced with the correct one.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-23
4.6
Assigning Function Keys
Note on TPs
Refer to Section 6.5 to learn how to assign buttons to touch panels.
Procedure
You can assign functions to function keys in your configuration. Click the
function key displayed on the screen. The Function Key Fx dialog box is
opened. Now, using the Functions button, select the function call you require
for key assignment from the list of functions.
There are two options for assigning function keys: global and local. Local
assignments have priority over global ones.
Global
signifies that the assignment applies to the whole configuration.
Local
signifies that the assignment applies only to individual

screens. The assignment of a function key may vary from
one screen to another. In this way you can initiate functions
especially for a particular situation.
A function key whose assignment changes from screen to
screen is known as soft key.
Always assign functions that must always be at hand to function keys, never
to soft keys.
Soft keys
You can use the function keys arranged directly around the screen as soft
keys. You can assign the following keys to the different display devices as
soft keys:
OP25, OP27
Keys F1 to F14.
OP35, OP37
Keys F1 to F20
You assign soft keys in the editor. You can assign an icon that contains the
soft key labeling as text or a graphic to a soft key.
Soft keys can also be assigned globally. You perform global assignment by
choosing System Screen/Keys from the menu. If, for example, you wish to
return to the same system screen every time you exit from a screen, you can
assign this function to a soft key by choosing System Screen/Keys and assign to it an icon such as ESC. This means that the key is assigned to every
screen.
Function keys
4-24
Function keys are labeled Kx. You assign function keys by choosing System
Screen/Keys from the menu. You can record the functions you assigned to
a key on labeling strips.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4.7
Settings for the Most Important Objects
Overview
When you configure an object type for example, messages more settings
have to be performed in ProTool. These details refer to communication, their
format on the TP or OP and printout. The table lists the most important types
of object and the settings required for them.
Object
Settings
Menu Item or Dialog Box
PLC
PLC Type, Driver
System PLC
Interface area
(SIMATIC S5 only)
System Area Pointers
Event Message Area
Event message window or

message line
System Screen/Keys
Message printout
Messages Attribute Window
Event messages
g
System Messages Settings

Message buffer
Call event message window and

event buffer by means of a
function key or button:
local
global
Screen
System Screen/Keys
Text
Output
Edit text
Variable
Messages Edit/Paste Field
Alarm messages
g
Alarm message area
Acknowledgment area
Alarm message window or

message line
System Screen/Keys
Message indicator
System Screen/Keys
Message printout
Messages Attribute Window

Message buffer
Edit text
Variable
Messages Edit/Paste Field
Text
Output
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
4-25
Object
Settings
Menu Item or Dialog Box
Input and output

Dynam. Input/output
Variable
Variable and text or graphic list
Trends and variables

Variable
Functions
Screen Fields Input/Output

Screen Fields Text or Graphic
List
Screen Fields Trend Graphic
Screen Fields Bar
Screen Fields Character Graphic
Screen Fields Graphic
Screen Fields Button
Screens
Trend graphic
Bar
Character graphic
Bitmap
Button1)
Screen Fields Trend Graphic
Trends
Trends
Time triggered:
Variable
Bit-triggered:
Variable
Trend request
Trend transfer 1
Pattern trends
Variable
Trend request
Trend transfer 1
Trend transfer 2 (for configured
switch buffer only)
Recipes
Variables
Data mailbox

Assign standard screens for

Create Data Records to
function keys or buttons:
local
global
Screens
System Screen/Keys
1) Touch panels only
4-26
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
Definition
Variables represent the lowest level in a configuration. Variables are defined

memory locations on the TP or OP into and from which values are written and
read, respectively. This may be done from the PLC or by means of an operator
input on the TP or OP.
Usage
You can use variables to do this:
Display process values

input/output
bar
trends
Control display on TP or OP
limit values
scale
hide fields
dynamic attributes
light indicator (touch panels)
Multiplex process values

Function parameters
Global and local
variables
Basically, we distinguish between two types of variable:
Global variables
Global variables are used to establish the link to the PLC. An address has to
be defined on the PLC for every global variable. The TP or OP accesses
this address in Read or Write mode.
Local variables
Local variables are not linked to the PLC. They are available only on the
TP or OP. You create local variables when, for example, you wish to enter
limit values by means of an operator input on the TP or OP.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
5-1
Variables
5.1
Defining Variables
Defining the type
Depending on the type of PLC you are using, you can define different types of
variable. Depending on the type of variable you select, you can also specify
byte length and decimals.
Examples for SIMATIC S7:
CHAR, BYTE, INT, WORD, DWORD, REAL, BOOL, STRING, Counter
Defining
addresses
For global variables, you enter the address from which the TP or OP should
read a value or to which it should write a value. Figure 5-1 shows, by way of
an example, the Variable dialog box for the SIMATIC S7.
Figure 5-1
Defining PLCs
Variable Dialog Box for the SIMATIC S7
You define a PLC under a symbolic name by choosing System PLC from the
menu. You specify this symbolic name in the Variable dialog box. The entire
address setting depends on the PLC you are using.
You do not specify an address for variable which are not linked to the PLC
(local variables). From the Variable dialog box, select PLC: No PLC.
Number of
elements (array
variables)
An array variable represents a number of variables featuring continuous memory address on the same SIMATIC S7-300/400. When you define an array
variable, enter the number of elements in the Variables dialog box (Figure 5-1)
at Number of elements.
Array variables are used with pattern trends (Section 6.4.2) and with recipe
(Section 8.1).
5-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
Updating
The following settings can be found under Options for downloading and uploading variable values between the TP or OP and the PLC:
Write directly
The value of a variable is written directly to the configured PLC address
once it has been entered on the TP or OP. This setting is the default setting
for input fields. There is no synchronization with the PLC in the case of
direct writing to the address.
Write indirectly
With indirect writing, the value of a variable on the PLC is written to intermediate storage, known as the data mailbox. You will find a detailed description of the data mailbox in Section 8.1. In the PLC program, the value
can be fetched from the data mailbox at the appropriate time.
By choosing Options from the menu, you can configure up to three identifications for every variable. These identifications are important only in as
far as Write indirectly is concerned. They are similarly written to the data
mailbox and may contain, for example, the address of a variable.
Note
Write indirectly is possible only with the SIMATIC S5 and the
SIMATIC S7.
If the attributes Write directly and Write indirectly are specified for a
variable, only the Write indirectly attribute is effective.
Read continuously
The variable is continuously updated, even when it is not on the current
screen. This is important with trends. A trend is normally required to be
plotted even when the screen has not been selected.
Online
If you select Online mode (default setting), the variable is supplied in operation by the PLC. If you deselect Online mode, the variable is unlinked
from the PLC. You can use this function if, for example, you wish to take
only parts of the system into service.
Polling time
If you enter a value greater than 0 for the polling time of a variable, the
value of the variable is transferred within the specified time.
Polling time is a multiple of the standard clock pulse in seconds. The standard clock pulse is set to 500 sec. If you specify a polling time of, say,
1.5 sec, it is three times the standard clock pulse. If you increase the standard clock pulse to 1000 msec by choosing System PLC from the menu,
the specified polling time is similarly increased, to 3 sec.
B modifying the standard clock pulse, you can globally increase the polling
times of all variables in a project.
If you enter 0 for the polling time, the variable is read only when a screen,
a message or a recipe is called. It is not updated thereafter.
You will find tips on optimizing polling times in chapter 16.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
5-3
Variables
Defining initial
values
You can assign an initial value to a variable in the Options dialog box. The
variable then has its initial value after the TP or OP starts up. If variables are
used for trend and bar graph scales, scales can be the default setting of the initial values.
Limit values
You can configure upper and lower limit values for every variable. Configured
limit values have different effects in input fields from output fields:
Input field
If you enter a value outside the configured limit values, the input is not accepted.
Output field
If values are output by the process that are outside the configured limit values, a change of color from the one you configured takes place (refer to
Section 6.2.2)..
The upper and lower limit values are set in the Limit Values dialog box.
Figure 5-2 shows the dialog box.
Figure 5-2
Upper and lower

limit values
5-4
Limit Values Dialog Box
You can configure the upper and lower limit values independently of each
other. The limit values are disabled in the default setting. You can define whether the specified limit value is determined by a constant or a variable. If you
specify a limit value variable, it must have the same format as the corresponding variable.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
Interpretation of
decimals
Limit values for variables are entered without a decimal point. Depending on
whether decimals have been specified for the variable, the constant for the limit value is interpreted in different ways. The number of specified decimals
determines the number of digits that are interpreted as decimals for the limit
value. The table shows an example.
Configured Decimals
Limit Value Input
Interpretation byProTool
2222
2222
2222
222.2
2222
22.22
Functions
Functions may be assigned to variables for example, to convert a value. This

means that a value on the PLC is converted before being displayed. Even inputs are converted before being written to the PLC. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on how to use functions. A list of all the functions available in ProTool will be found in Appendix A.
Variables of same
address
If you use an address on the PLC more than once, it is advisable to configure
different variables if that address is used for both input and output fields. The
input field is otherwise updated every time the variable is changed.
A variable is also modified by an input on the TP or OP, not merely as a result
of reading by the PLC. This means that once input has been terminated on the
TP or OP, the output field is updated to reflect the new value. In the meantime,
the value which is still the old value has been read from the PLC. The old
value is then displayed briefly in the output field. While this is happening, the
new value is being transferred to the PLC. The new value is displayed the next
time the output field is updated.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
5-5
Variables
5.2
Displaying Data Types on the TP or OP
Dependence on
PLC
Table 5-1
There are different types of variables for every PLC. Use the following tables
to determine the dependence between the type of a variable and its display on
the TP or OP.
Types for the SIMATIC S5
Display
Type of variable
DF
DH
KC
KF
KG
KH
KM
KT
KY
KZ
BCD4
Decimal
x KG
xG
x KG
x KG
nG
nG
x KG
nG
xG
Hexadecimal
n KG
xG
n KG
xG
nG
n KG
nG
nG
Binary
n KG
nG
xG
n KG
nG
nG
String
Dec,Dec
n KG
nG
nG
n KG
xG
nG
Text symbol
x KG
xG
xG
x KG
xG
xG
Graphic
symbol
x KG
xG
xG
x KG
xG
xG
Combination possible
Combination not sensible

Combination not possible
K Decimals possible
G Limit values possible
Table 5-2
Types for the SIMATIC S7, Part I
Display
Type of variable
CHAR
BYTE
INT
WORD
DINT
DWORD
Decimal
xG
xG
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
Hexadecimal
xG
xG
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
Binary
xG
xG
x KG
x KG
String
Dec,Dec
x KG
x KG
Text symbol
xG
xG
x KG
x KG
Graphic symbol
xG
xG
x KG
x KG
K Decimals possible
G Limit values possible
5-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
Table 5-3
Types for the SIMATIC S7, Part II
Display
Type of variable
REAL
|BOOL
STRING
Timer1)
Counter1)
x KG
x KG
xG
Hexadecimal
x KG
xG
Binary
x KG
xG
String
Dec,Dec
x KG
xG
Text symbol
x KG
xG
Graphic symbol
x KG
xG
Decimal
K
G
1)
Decimals possible
Limit values possible
Not for the SIMATIC S7-200
Table 5-4
Types for the SIMATIC 500/505
Display
Type of variable
BIT
+/INT
INT
+/DOUBLE
DOUBLE
REAL
ASCII
Decimal
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
Hexadecimal
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
Binary
x KG
x KG
String
Dec,Dec
x KG
x KG
Text symbol
x KG
x KG
Graphic symbol
x KG
x KG
K
G
Decimals possible
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
5-7
Variables
Table 5-5
Local Variables
Display
Type of variable
INT
UINT
LONG
ULONG
FLOAT
BYTE
STRING
CHAR
|BOOL
Decimal
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
xG
xG
Hexadecimal
x KG
x KG
x KG
x KG
xG
xG
Binary
x KG
x KG
xG
xG
String
Dec,Dec
x KG
x KG
xG
xG
Text symbol
x KG
x KG
xG
xG
Graphic symbol
x KG
x KG
xG
xG
K
G
Decimals possible
5.3
Displaying Timers
Usage
SIMATIC S5 and SIMATIC S7-300/400

You can set the time base for timers. You can choose between 10 msec,
100 msec, 1 sec and 10 sec. The TP or OP detects the time base you have
set and standardizes the displayed value to display in seconds.
Inputs on the TP or OP are similarly made in seconds . The TP or OP converts the input value to the smallest possible time basis, irrespective of the
configured decimals.
SIMATIC S7-200
Every timer has a fixed time base. The TP or OP does not standardize the
timer value but displays it as it is. Configure in ProTool the decimals as a
function of the timer you are using.
Decimals and time

base
5-8
With timers, you specify the time base with the decimals. The time base determines the clock interval. The difference between a time base of 1 sec and
10 sec is implemented by the size of the field. If the field length is 3, the time
base is 1 sec; if the field length is 4, the time base is 10 sec. The table shows
the dependencies between decimals and the time base.
Decimals
Time Base
Range of Values
Step Size
2
1
0
0
10 msec
100 msec
1 sec
10 sec
0.01 9.99 sec

0.1 99.9 sec
1 999 sec
10 9990 sec
0.01 sec
0.1 sec
1 sec
10 sec
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
Examples
Limit values for

timers
A few examples are shown below of how the TP or OP standardizes inputs in

seconds to the corresponding time base.
Input on TP or OP
Configured Decimals
Standardization to
Time Base
3.8 sec
10 msec
13.8 sec
100 msec
3.81 sec
10 msec
3 sec
1 sec
3000 sec
10 sec
Limit values may be specified only as integers. The actual limit value depends
on the decimals configured for the variable. Limit values are similarly specified in seconds for example:
Decimals
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Time Base
Maximum Limit
Value Input
Interpretation by
ProTool
10 msec
999
9.99 sec
100 msec
999
99.9 sec
1 sec
999
999 sec
10 sec
9990
9990 s
5-9
Variables
5.4
Controlling the Display on the TP or OP by Means of

Variables
Purpose
You can also use variables for flexible display of process values on the TP or
OP. You can also specify the values by means of an operator input on the TP or
OP or from the PLC. A brief description is provided below of the different settings.
Limit values
You can configure limit values for variables. These limit values can be read
from variables. An example of this is shown in Section 5.5.
Scale
The scales of the X and Y axes on trends as well as the Y axis of bar graphs
can be implemented by means of variables.
Dynamic attributes
You can configure the colors of an input/output field as a function of the value
of a variable. The flashing of a field can be controlled in a similar manner.
Hide
Depending on the value of a variable, fields on screens can be displayed and

hidden. With this option, fields may appear on the TP or OP during the commissioning phase, for example, which are then no longer visible in routine operation. The variable might be assigned by means of the current password level.
The field is displayed only after the supervisor has logged in.
A different variable from that assigned to the field must be used to hide it. The
conditions for hiding the field must be set in dependence of the variable. In this
instance, you must take into account whether the variable is an integer or Boolean type variable. A few examples are listed below.
Figure 5-3
Light indicators
(TPs only)
5-10
Hide Dialog Box
You can configure different background colors and the labeling of light indicators for touch panels as a function of the status of a defined bit or of the value
of a variable. An example of this is shown in Section 6.5.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
5.5
Local variables
Purpose
Local variables are not linked to the PLC and are available only on the TP or
OP. You create local variables, for example, when you require limit values to
be set by means of an operator input on the TP or OP.
Example
You configure an input field containing a variable linked to the PLC. Let us
call this variable the process variable. Specify for the process variable an upper
limit value which is read from a local variable. Let us call this variable the limit value variable. It is not linked to the PLC.
Attach the limit value variable to a further input field. This input field can be
used for entering a limit value for the process variable on the TP or OP. If the
entered value is higher than the specified limit value, the input on the TP or OP
is not accepted.
Step
1
Action
Insert an input field in the screen editor by choosing
Screen Field Input/Output. The Input/Output dialog
box is opened.
Select the Input field type.
Click in the Variable field on Edit and configure the process
variable with the following values (example for S7):
Name:
DB:
DBW:
PLC:
Click Limit values. The Limit Values dialog box is opened.
Select at Upper limit value the Variable option and enter the name
VAR_5 for the limit value variable.
Configure the limit value variable with the following values:

Name:
PLC:
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
VAR_4
12
0
PLC_1
VAR_5
No PLC
Exit from all the dialog boxes by clicking OK in order to apply the
inputs.
Insert a further field in your screen and assign the limit value
variable VAR_5 to it.
5-11
Variables
5.6
Multiplexing
Purpose
Multiplexing is possible with input/output fields, trends and bar graphs. With
multiplexing, not just one but several variables, which may be of different types, are assigned to these elements. Assignment depends on the value of an
index variable.
You can control all the variables of a screen by means of the index variable, for
example. This means that there is no need to configure several screens for
identical applications.
Example of
multiplexing
Figure 5-4 shows a practical example. On a bar graph, we want to view the
contents of tanks T1, T2 or T3 as a function of the index variable VAR_S1. The
contents of the tanks is read from variables VAR_1 to VAR_3.
VAR_1
T1
T1
VAR_S1
2000
VAR_2
0
T2
VAR_3
T3
Figure 5-4
VAR_S1
0
1
2
Display
VAR_1
VAR_2
VAR_3
Example of Multiplexing Variables
In the following example, variables VAR_1 to VAR_3 are assigned to three

values of index variable VAR_S1. The PLC in this example is a SIMATIC S7.
5-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
Step
Action
Create a field for bar graphs on a screen by choosing

Screen Fields Bar. The Bar dialog box appears.
Click the Multiplexing button.
Enter the symbolic name Var_S1 in the Index Variable field.

Click Edit in order to edit the variable. The Variable dialog box is
opened.
Enter:
Type:
DB:
DBW:
PLC:
INT
15
0
PLC_1
VAR_S1 accepts the values 0, 1 or 2. A variable (VAR_1, VAR_2

and VAR_3) representing the current value of tank T1, T2 or T3 is
assigned to every one of these three values.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Enter the symbolic name VAR_1 in the Variable field. Click Edit
in order to edit the variable. The Variable dialog box is opened.
Enter:
Now, click in the Multiplex dialog box on the Add button. Variable
VAR_1 is applied to the display field and assigned to the value
(index) 0 of index variable VAR_S1.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for variables VAR_2 and VAR_3. The figure

shows the appearance of the corresponding configuration.
Type:
DB:
DBW:
PLC:
INT
16
2
PLC_1
5-13
Variables
Step
Action
Exit from the Multiplex dialog box by clicking OK. There is now a
check mark on the Multiplex button in the Bar dialog box to indicate that multiplexing is in use (refer to Figure 5-5). In addition,
the index variable is specified instead of the Variable field.
Figure 5-5
5-14
Display for Active Multiplexing
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variables
5.7
Symbol Table in STEP 7
Definition
In STEP 7, you can assign meaningful names, known as symbols, for addresses. Symbols are stored in a symbol table containing the data type, address and
comments. You can use a symbol from the symbol table in ProTool for configuring a variable.
A symbol may also be a structured data block which you can double-click to
open.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for using the symbol table:
1. You have installed ProTool under Windows with STEP 7 integrated.
2. You have assigned parameters in ProTool to an S7 PLC connection, selecting an S7 CPU (refer to Section 4.2). This means that the corresponding
STEP 7 symbol table is also set.
3. Symbols have already been created in the STEP 7 symbol table.
Applying symbols
To apply symbols from the STEP 7 symbol table, open the Variable dialog box.
The symbols contained in the symbol table are now listed in the Symbol field.
The following entries are applied to the dialog box as soon as you select one of
the symbols:
the symbol name as the name of the variable
the address
the data type
the comment.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
5-15
Variables
Modifications
You can subsequently modify the name of the variable without the link to the
symbol table being lost. Any modifications which you make in STEP 7 to the
symbol table are applied to ProTool after being saved.
Figure 5-6 shows the Variable dialog box with the STEP 7 symbol table.
Figure 5-6
5-16
Variable Dialog Box with Integrated STEP 7 Symbol Table
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Example
Screens display a process. They are thus an image of the process. Figure 6-1
shows an example of a screen displaying a mixing unit. This might be a unit
for mixing various fruit juices. Ingredients are filled into a mixer from different tanks and then mixed. The liquid levels in the tanks and in the mixer are
displayed. The intake valves can be opened and closed by means of operator
inputs on the TP or OP. The motor for the mixer can be turned on and off in a
similar manner.
Quantity in tank (in l)
Tank 1:
Tank 2:
Tank 3:
Bottling machine:
Mixing unit
Tank 1
Fixed window
Tank 2
Tank 3
Basic area
Quantity in
mixer (l)
Valve 4
M
Figure 6-1
To bottling machine
off
on
Help
ESC
Soft keys (OP)

Buttons (TP).
Example of a Screen A Mixing Unit
Components of a
screen
A screen can consist of static and dynamic components. Static components

include text and graphics. Dynamic components are linked to the PLC and
visualize current values from the PLC memory. Visualization may take place
in the form of alphanumeric displays, trends or bars. Dynamic components
are also inputs made by the operator on the TP or OP and written to the PLC
memory. The link to the PLC is established by means of variables.
Screen editor
Screens are created with a separate editor. When you call the Screens editor,
the TP or OP is displayed. You can zoom this display in or out. If, for example, you wish to edit details, you can do it much more simply with an enlargement. If you have several windows open simultaneously, a reduction in
size may suffice for reasons of space.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-1
Screens
Basic area
Screens are configured in the basic area. A symbolic name is assigned to

every screen. Names are entered by choosing Screen Attributes. You specify this name whenever you edit, reference or delete the screen. In addition,
screens are numbered automatically. You cannot modify this number.
Fixed window
You enable and disable the fixed window by choosing System Screen/Keys
from the menu. You configure the contents of the fixed window in the screen
editor. You do not have to assign a symbolic name to the contents of the fixed
window. Since the fixed window is always present on the display, its contents
do not change with the different screens. To access the fixed window, click it
with the mouse.
Soft keys/buttons
Soft keys are keys featuring variable assignment on the operator panels. Buttons are virtual keys on the touch-sensitive screen of a touch panel. Soft keys
and buttons can be configured for specific screens. When you are configuring, you assign functions to these operating elements. You can illustrate the
task of an operator element by means of a graphic or text.
You can use soft keys and buttons to call another screen, to turn a motor on
and off, or to call the message buffer, for example.
Selecting screens
Every configured screen has to be integrated into the control process of the TP
or OP so that it can be called. The Select Screen function is available for this
purpose. This function may be assigned to an input field or a function key
(OPs) or a button (TPs), for example. You specify the name of the screen as
the parameter. This means that a screen can be called by means of an input
field or a soft key or button.
With input fields, soft keys and buttons, the function is available only locally
on this screen. If you require the function to be available globally, you must
assign the function to a Kx function key on the operator panel or to a button
located in the fixed window of the touch panel.
Menu for screens
When you call a screen, the Screen command is added to the menu bar. The
different submenu items are described below in the order in which they appear on the screen.
Attributes
With Attributes, you specify the following settings for the screen.
name of screen
background color of main area
number of screen
declare screen as start screen
The start screen is the first screen to appear after the TP or OP starts up.
enter information text for screen.
6-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Fields
Screens consist of different fields. There are various types of field; their use
is unrestricted as far as the configuration of screens is concerned. Unrestricted means that you can determine the numbers and types of fields, as well as
their location and size. When you select a field, the cursor assumes the symbol of the field. ProTool provides the following types of field:
text
character graphic
graphic
input/output
text or graphic list
trend Graphic
bar graph
button (TPs).
Set/Reset Bit button (TPs)
Select Screen button (TPs)
Light indicator button (TPs)
Note
Do not position fields on trend graphics. The fields are moved every time a
trend graphic is updated.
Surface
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
You can customize your user interface during configuration by means of the
following settings:
grid
touch grid for TP
color setting (intensity and contrast)
Zoom.
6-3
Screens
Zoom
You use this feature to reduce or enlarge the display on the screen or to show
the screen area at its full size.
Print
You use this feature to print parts of your configuration.
Monochrome
With an OP25 configuration, the display on the screen is switched between

Monochrome and Color.
Reference Text
Size/Position
Toolbars
6-4
For the active screen, the screen in the reference language is displayed or
hidden.
Here you activate and deactivate the display of the toolbar illustrated in the
margin. The toolbar shows the current cursor position and the size of the
element you selected.
By choosing Window Toolbars... from the menu, you can activate and
deactivate some of the tools which you have to access frequently when working in the screen editor. The tools have been allocated to the following toolbars:
General
Align
Set Color
Select Field
Zoom.
Appendix C contains an overview of all the tools shown on the toolbars.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Set Color
Use the colors shown in the illustration to define the foreground color (left
mouse button) and the background color (right mouse button). The current
setting is displayed at the beginning of the colors.
Colors
Background
Foreground
Notes on using
colors
Color availability:
ProTool reduces the color availability of imported graphics to eight colors.
You should therefore avoid using several shades of one color simultaneously
for example, several shades of gray in your graphics.
Gray values for monochrome displays:
On the OP27, TP27 and OP35 featuring monochrome displays, the colors
used in a configuration are converted into different gray values. The table
shows which color roughly corresponds to which gray value.
Color
White
Yellow
10
Cyan
30
Green
40
Magenta
60
Blue
70
Red
90
Black
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Gray Value [in %]
100
6-5
Screens
6.1
Text, Character Graphic and Graphic
This section
contains
6.1.1
The static screen components text, character graphic and graphic are described in the following.
Text
Purpose
Depending on the configuration, text components refer to different parts of a

screen in order to be able to assign the displayed fields to the actual process.
In terms of the example in Figure 6-1, the names Mixing Unit, Tank 1
and Tank 2 are static text components.
Fonts
Different fonts are available for identifying the priorities of text components
within a screen by the font or font size. You can set up to four different fonts
for the TP or OP. Three fonts are language-dependent, the fourth is languageindependent.
Characteristics of
fonts
Language-dependent means that different fonts can be used for the three
languages available on the TP or OP. Language-independent means that the
same font is used in every language.
By default, the symbol set is set for the language-independent font. The symbol set is used with the graphic character. The fonts have to be constant-width
fonts. This means that every letter occupies an equal amount of space. By
contrast, with proportional fonts every letter requires a different amount of
space. In this particular case, for example, an i requires less space than a
w.
Selecting a font
Proceed as follows if you wish to use different fonts on the TP or OP:

Step
Default
6-6
Action
Choose System Fonts from the menu.
Select the language and assign the fonts from the list on the left,
Windows Fonts, to the right side.
Call a screen.
Choose Edit Font from the menu and select a font. If you now
create a text field, the font you selected is used.
By default, ProTool fonts are supplied for the language-dependent fonts. You
may use any Windows font you like, provided it is a constant-width font. Appropriate fonts are displayed in the list box of the Fonts dialog box.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.1.2
Character Graphic
Purpose
With character graphics you compose graphics from different symbols. For
example, you can create a table from the following characters:
If you use graphics instead of character graphics, the memory
requirement for your configuration will be reduced appreciably.
When you select Character Graphic, a window containing the symbols available to you is opened (Figure 6-2). You click on a symbol to insert it in the
character graphic field.
Figure 6-2
Character Graphic Symbols
Symbol packages
Symbol packages are grouped in the Line Character field. A symbol package
contains the symbols for all directional representations. Specifically, this refers to horizontal and vertical directions, corners, crosses and bifurcations.
Click on the arrow keys on the character graphics palette. Every click inserts
the corresponding symbol in the graphic character field. Using CTRL and the
arrow keys, you can draw lines quickly and simply.
Scope of
supply
Three fixed symbol packages are supplied with ProTool. These are the line
characters single, bold and double. In addition, four other symbol pakkages are available, called USER 1 to USER 4. You can modify and customize these symbol packages.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-7
Screens
6.1.3
Graphics
Creating graphics
To create graphics, ProTool features the option of embedding external graphic editors via the OLE interface of Windows. In this way, you can always
work with the tool which is most familiar to you.
You can create graphics directly by means of a graphics program or embed
existing graphics into your project. To create or embed graphics, choose
Screen Fields Graphic from the menu.
Representation in
ProTool
Every graphic used in ProTool is represented as a bitmap, irrespective of

whether the graphic was created with a pixel-oriented graphics program, such
as Paintbrush, or a vector-oriented graphics program, such as Designer. Vector graphics are first converted into pixel graphics before being displayed in
ProTool.
If you have created a graphic, Windows scales it so that it fits in the open
field. If the graphic and the open field have different height/width ratios, this
will result in distortions. We will give you a few tips on how to avoid this
later in this chapter. Generally speaking, you should bear the following in
mind:
Recommendation
Icons for soft keys
Use pixel graphics mainly in those cases where the size of the window
cannot be modified, such as with icons for soft keys or buttons.
You should use vector graphics when the size of the window has to be
modified later.
If you use the same graphic in different sizes, you have to create several
objects for them in ProTool. ProTool cannot produce graphics in different sizes from a single graphic. In this case, you should duplicate your
graphic and store it in different sizes.
Always create graphics in your graphics program with the same height/
width ratio as the open field in ProTool. Remember that a graphic having a size of, say, 10 cm 20 cm cannot be reproduced faithfully in
terms of pixels in a field of 1 cm 2 cm. In doing so, information is
lost.
The size of icons, unlike that of bitmaps, is fixed. Use icons for identifying
soft keys. If you create an icon with a pixel editor such as Paint, a border of
the correct size is automatically specified in the editor.
If you are using a vector editor, you have to create the border yourself. In this
instance, the following height/width ratios x:y result
OP25, OP27, TP27
OP35, OP37, TP37
6-8
53 38 pixels
80 58 pixels
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Embedding
graphics
Create a graphic field so that you can choose whether you create a new graphic or paste an existing graphic.
New graphics
If you wish to create a new graphic, you are offered OLE-compatible applications. From these applications, select the one you want. ProTool initiates this
application.
Creating from a file
If the graphic which you want to embed exists, you can directly enter the
path and the file name or select the file from the directory structure which is
displayed.
Selected Servers
If you choose Options OLE Settings from the menu, you will find all the
possible applications that ProTool makes available as Selected Servers.
This corresponds to the list box when you create new graphics. If you wish to
restrict the list of Selected Servers to the applications you use, remove all the
applications you do not use.
Constraints
You will find known constraints for graphics programs, graphic cards and
drivers by clicking the ReadMe icon in the ProTool program group.
Editing a bitmap
The following options are available in ProTool for editing existing bitmaps:
Edit Bitmap Object Edit on the menu (equivalent to double-clicking

on the graphic while CTRL is pressed):
This means that you can edit the bitmap object directly on the configured
screen.
Edit Bitmap Object Open on the menu (equivalent to doubleclicking the graphic):
This means that you open the corresponding graphic editor in a separate
window.
Note:
When editing in ProTool, set the zoom factor to 100 % to make work
easier.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-9
Screens
Example:
Distortion-free
graphics
To obtain distortion-free graphics, the sizes of the open graphic field in

ProTool and of the graphic must be identical. In this way, distortions due to
different scaling factors for x and y coordinates are avoided. To achieve this,
proceed as follows:
Step
Action
Choose Screen Size/Position from the menu and enable the

Size/Position toolbar. This box displays the present position of
the mouse pointer and the size of the current object in pixels.
Open a graphic field having a size, say, of 600 200. This means
that the field has a height/width ratio of 3:1. Note the pixel values specified in the lower section of the dialog box.
Select the graphic editor you require, say Designer, from the
selection list.
Display the ruler of the graphic editor, if it is not already displayed.
Before you start work on a drawing in a graphics program, create

a frame first. The frame must have the same height/width ratios
as the field in ProTool.
Create or import the graphic you require such that it does not
protrude beyond the frame at any point. The figure shows a
graphic in a frame measuring 15 5 cm. This similarly produces
a height/width ratio of 3:1.
Frame
6-10
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Step
Example of
modifying a
graphic
Action
Once you have finished the drawing, set the background color of
the frame so that it is not visible in the configuration. If you
modify the graphic, you will still have your frame with the correct height/width ratio.
Return to ProTool. The graphic is now scaled without distortion.
If you wish to modify the size of a vector graphic embedded in ProTool, it is

not enough to change the field in ProTool. You must also modify its size in
the graphic editor so that distortions do not occur. Proceed as follows:
Step
Action
Choose the menu item Screen Size/Position and activate the

box for position details.
Modify the size of the graphic field and note the details referring
to its size.
Double-click the graphic field to enable the graphic editor.
In the graphic editor, select all the objects of the graphic,

including the frame, and enlarge the graphic with the same
height/width ratio as in ProTool.
Close the graphic editor by updating the file. The menu item
depends on the graphic editor you are using.
Example: File Exit and return to ProTool
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-11
Screens
6.2
Input and Output
Input
With input fields, you enter a value on the TP or OP and the value is transferred to the PLC. Input fields are touch-sensitive on touch panels.
Output
The current value is read from the PLC and displayed in the output field on
the TP or OP.
Input/Output
The current value is read from the PLC and displayed in the input/output
field on the TP or OP. You can also make inputs in this field at the same time.
Input/output fields are touch-sensitive on touch panels.
Symbolic
input/output
Input and output may even be symbolic in all fields. Symbolic means that
work is performed with text or graphics instead of values. Either text or a
graphic is assigned to the value of a variable.
Text symbol
For turning a motor on and off, for example, the values of a variable are not
self-explanatory. Text is easier for the operator to understand. The assignment
of values and text might look as follows:
0
1
2
OFF
SLOW
FAST
The TP or OP now displays the corresponding text instead of a value.

Graphic symbol
If, for example, you wish to display the status (ON/OFF) of a valve on the
screen, you can do this by assigning a graphic. The assignment of values and
graphics might look as follows:
0
(for OFF)
(for ON)
The TP or OP now displays the corresponding graphic symbol instead of a

value.
Creating input/output You create input/output fields by choosing

Screen Fields Input/Output
fields
The dialog box shown in Figure 6-3 is opened.
You create symbolic inputs and outputs by choosing
Screen Fields Symbol List (refer to Section 6.2.1).
The following data are required in your configuration to display an input/output field on the TP or OP (Figure 6-3):
6-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Usage
The only setting that is possible here is Variable. You can use an input/output
field only in conjunction with a variable.
Field Type
At this point you set the field as an input field, an output field or an input/
output field.
Display
At this point you set how the contents of the field will be displayed. You can
choose between different formats:
decimal (as integer or with decimals)
hexadecimal
binary
string1)
text symbol
graphic symbol
1) To display alphanumeric characters on the TP or OP for a connection to
the SIMATIC S7, enter the type STRING in the Variable dialog box. You
cannot specify CHAR. The string must not be longer than 80 bytes.
Field Length
At this point you can specify the length of the field as the number of characters.
Password level
You can assign a password level here to protect input fields and combined
input/output fields on the TP or OP from access by unauthorized persons.
Information text
You provide the user with additional information on the permissible range of
values for the input field by using information text.
Figure 6-3
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Input/Output Dialog Box
6-13
Screens
Example of
configuring an
input field
The procedure for configuring an input field is demonstrated in the following

example for a SIMATIC S5:
Step
Action
Select Input/Output from the open screen either by choosing

Screen Fields from the menu or directly from the tool palette.
Position the mouse pointer within the screen at the position

where you want to place the input field. Hold down the left
mouse button and drag the field to the size you require. Then the
Input/Output dialog box appears, in which you specify the input
field.
Perform the following settings:

Usage
Field Type
Display
Field Length
Password level
Variable
Input
Decimal
5
1
The Variable field displays the symbolic name VAR_1. Click the
Edit button to edit a variable. The Variable dialog box appears.
Enter the following values in the Variable dialog box:

DB:
DW:
Type:
PLC:
10
2
KF
PLC_1
Exit from the Variable and Input/Output dialog boxes by choosing OK.
The following display is now visible on the screen:

>2345
This represents the configured field, to which variable VAR_1 is
attached.
Notes on TPs
Always configure the size of input fields as a multiple of the touch grid. If
you use, for example, the 8 8 font and position two input fields within
a grid cell, one of the two input fields cannot be operated.
Input fields and buttons must not overlap. An overlap is rejected during
compilation and an error message is issued.
If you wish to configure a background color for an input field that is different from the background color of the main area, the touch-sensitive area
of the touch panel can be recognized by the size of the colored field.
Information text is particularly helpful on a TP since the position of the

input window on a TP does not reveal the assignment between the input
field and the input window.
6-14
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.2.1
Input/Output Fields Containing a Symbolic Display
Purpose
Text or graphic
lists
Text
Text elements or a graphic often explain a setting better than a numerical

value can. For this reason you can display the value of a variable symbolically in input/output fields. This means that you can display text and graphics
dynamically in other words, situation-dependent text and graphics, color
changes etc.
Symbolic inputs and outputs are entered by using text or graphic

lists. To do this, choose Screen Fields Text or Graphic List
from the menu.
If you want to assign text, select the Text Symbol display and edit the text list.
For text lists, text is displayed or entered instead of the value of the variable.
Text lists are possible with input and output fields. In the case of input fields,
a window is displayed on the TP or OP for selecting text.
Note on touch panels
When configuring text, make sure that only 26 characters are displayed in
the window for entering symbolic values.
Graphic
If you wish to assign a graphic, select in the Input/Output dialog box Text or
Graphic List as the display and edit the graphic list. The graphic used here
has to be created directly using an application or has to be embedded as a
file. For graphic lists, a graphic is displayed instead of the value of the variable. Graphic lists are possible only with output fields.
Formats for text or

graphic lists
You can specify the values of variables in different formats as a digit or as

the state of a bit. This means that you can drive the display either by means
of a digit or by means of a bit. In all, there are three different settings; their
significance is as follows:
Decimal
The value of a variable is evaluated as a decimal. Text or a graphic may be

assigned to any value between 0 and 9999. You can also assign text or a graphic to a whole range of values. For example, the string Warming-up
phase might occur in the range from 0 to 10 and Ready in the range from
11 to 100.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-15
Screens
Binary
The bits of a variable are evaluated. If a bit is set to 1, the assigned text or
graphic appears on the display. In the case of text lists, the corresponding bit
is set on the PLC when the text is selected.
Up to 16 bits of a data word can be assigned. In this instance, you can distribute the bits of a data word over several text or graphic lists. If you do not
require all the bits of the data word in a text or graphic list, you can use the
remaining bits in other text or graphic lists. The only condition is that no two
bits can be set simultaneously by the PLC within a text or graphic list. If this
were the case, a blank field would appear on the TP or OP.
Bit
The status of a bit of the variable is evaluated. You can assign text or graphic
for 0 or 1.
Example of a text
list
The text list for the different operating modes of a motor might look as
follows:
0
1
2
OFF
SLOW
FAST
Figure 6-4 shows the dialog box in which this example is configured.
Figure 6-4
6-16
Dialog box Text or Graphic List Text
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Example of a
graphic list
The states OFF and ON should always be represented by a symbol. The

corresponding variable values are 0 and 1. The graphic list thus looks as
follows:
0
1
Step
Action
Choose Screen Fields Text or Graphic List and click

and drag a rectangular field.
From the Input/Output box, select

Display: Graphic Symbol.
The figure shows the dialog box with the selection. Click at List
on the Edit button.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Click in the Text or Graphic List Graphic dialog box on the New
button. Select, for example, the Bitmap program from the servers
presented to you. The graphic editor is called. You will see a border of the same size as the field that you clicked and dragged. You
can draw only within this border.
Create the symbol
Update the file and close the graphic editor. The drawing you
have just created is stored under the symbolic name GRAPHIC_1.
Click the Add button. Figure 6-5 shows how your dialog box
should now look.
Click the Duplicate button. This causes your drawing to be copied

and stored under the name GRAPHIC_2.
Click the Edit button and modify the drawing to
6-17
Screens
Step
9
Update the file and close the graphic editor.
10
Enter 1as the value and click the Add button.
11
Exit from all dialog boxes by choosing OK to apply the settings.
Figure 6-5
6-18
Action
Creating a Graphic List
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.2.2
Dynamic Attributes
Purpose
Attributes are available for input and outputs fields in ProTool to draw the
users attention to certain situations, for example exceeding a limit value.
The attributes relate to the color of a field and its flashing. You can assign
attributes dynamically in other words, a different value may apply depending on the value of the variable. For example, you can configure attributes
in such a way that the field is shown in red when the limit value is exceeded.
The attributes available for use are either linked to the value of a variable
assigned to the input/output field or to a separate variable, referred to as the
multiplex variable. The advantage of multiplexing variables lies in the fact
that they may influence several input/output fields simultaneously. This
means, for example, that upon a change in production input/output fields
flash, because fresh inputs have to be made by the operator.
To use a multiplexing variable, click in the Dynamic Attributes dialog box on
the Control button. The Control Variable dialog box appears. As yet, the control variable is still de-activated. To activate it, remove the selection from the
Deactivate field. Then choose the variable with which you wish to control
the variable.
Example
Figure 6-6 shows an example of the way in which the color of the output
field indicates to the user whether a process is within the normal or critical
range.
Figure 6-6
Dynamic Attributes Dialog Box
The example might have the following assignment:

Meaning
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Range of Values
Attributes
Normal range
0 to 10
Color is green
Critical range
11 to 12
Color is amber
Limit value exceeded
1315
Color is red and flashes
6-19
Screens
6.3
Bar Graphs
Definition
A bar graph displays a value from the PLC in the form of a rectangular area.
With bar graphs, you can recognize at a glance how far away the current value is from from the limits or whether a specified setpoint has been reached
(Figure 6-7). Bar graphs can be used to display parameters such as fill levels
and quantities produced.
200
150
Limits
100
50
0
Figure 6-7
Settings
Bar Graph (Example)
With bar graphs, you are free to define the labeling of the Y axis, the direction, the border, and the scale, bar graph and background colors in any way
you like. You can include upper and lower limit lines to denote limit values.
Bar graphs are linked to the PLC by means of variables. You can use other
variables in addition to the variable containing the bar graph value which you
wish to display. Depending on the value of these variables, it is possible, for
example, for a limit value to be visualized when it has been reached by
means of a change of colors, or the field can be hidden or displayed.
Hiding fields
Depending on the configured value of a variable, it is possible for the Bar

field to be hidden or displayed (refer to Section 5.4).
Multiplexing
You will find an example configuration for multiplexing a bar graphic in

Section 5.6.
6-20
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Example of
SIMATIC S5
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Step
Action
After opening the screen, choose Screen Fields from

the menu and select Bar, or select it directly from the tool
palette.
Position the mouse pointer within the screen at the location

where you wish to insert the field. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the field to the size you require. When you release
the mouse button, the dialog box, which is shown in the figure
and in which you specify the bar graph, is displayed.
Apply the default settings for Direction, Scale Color, Border, Y

Axis and Colors.
Click on Edit beneath Variable.
In the Variabledialog box, enter the Name as Tank_2. Under

Type, assign the format KF to the variable.
Under PLC, enter the name you set earlier, Quickmix, by choosing System PLC from the menu, and enter the variable
address as DB46, DW3.
With the Limit Values button, define the two constants as 175 for
the upper limit value and 65 for the lower limit value.
Press OK in both cases to confirm your input and to exit from the
Limit Values, Variable and Bar dialog boxes.
6-21
Screens
6.4
Trend Graphics
Definition
Trends are used continuously to display a value from the PLC. A trend graphic contains all the settings for the coordinate system such as scales of axes,
the number of samples and colors. Up to six trends can be shown in a trend
graphic simultaneously.
Trends may be created independently of the trend graphic. Every trend is
stored under a symbolic name. Specify in the curve graphic the symbolic
name of the trends which you require to be displayed in the curve graphic.
The total of all the configured trends is called the trend list.
Display types
Trends can be displayed in different forms for example, as lines, dots or

bars. In addition, you can also specify the shift direction of the trend. This
depends on where the actual value of the trend is currently located.
Types of trend
We distinguish between two types of trend, depending on how trend values

are recorded:
Trends
are suitable for slowly varying trend values. The TP or OP reads the value
from the PLC upon a clock pulse or trigger and stores it internally. When a
screen containing the trend is called, the internal buffer of the TP or OP
buffer is output and displayed.
Pattern trends
are used primarily for quickly changing trend values. In this instance the values are stored on the PLC. By setting a bit, the TP or OP reads the memory
area on the PLC and displays all the values together as a trend.
X axis, Y axis
You first have to set the coordinate axes in a trend graphic. One of two Y
axes can be assigned to any trend in the trend graphic. You can set labeling of
the X axis by means of the
time
number of samples/max., or
a variable or constant.
Display of the axes, and their labeling, can be enabled and disabled in the
configuration.
Guide lines and

limit value lines
You can define a horizontal guide line in the trend graphic for any Y axis.
This means that, for example, you can insert a setpoint line in your trend
graphic in order to obtain a quick overview of deviations from setpoints by
actual values.
In addition, you can configure upper and lower limit lines for every trend.
6-22
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Hiding trend
graphics
Depending on the value configured for a variable, the trend graphic may be
hidden or displayed.
Multiplexing
trends
Trend selection can be controlled by means of an index variable. A trend is

assigned to every value of the index variable. This means that, depending on
the value of the index variable, the corresponding trend is displayed on the
TP or OP.
Principle
Figure 6-8 shows the principle of multiplexing trends. Temperature values

Temp1 to Temp3 are stored in DB 10 on the PLC at addresses DW 37,
DW 39 and DW 41. Variables Var1 to Var3 are configured for these memory
addresses on the TP or OP. For every one of these variables, a trend buffer is
created on the TP or OP, its size depending on the configured number of samples/max. The value of index variable Var_A determines the buffer from
which the values are read for the trend graphic you wish to have displayed.
With this type of multiplexing, all the trends are up to date in the background.
Temp1
Temp2
Temp3
DW 39
DW 41
PLC
DB 10 DW 37
Trend Graphic
TP or OP
Var1
Buffer1
Var2
Buffer2
Var3
Buffer3
2
1
0
Figure 6-8
Settings
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Var_A
Index variable
Multiplexing Trends (Principle)
To multiplex a trend, click in the Trend Graphic dialog box on the

Multiplex... button. Then assign the trends to values of the variables. The
multiplex variable is entered in the Trend Graphic dialog box instead of the
trend (refer to Figure 6-9). You can thus see the trend for which Multiplexing is set at a glance.
6-23
Screens
Figure 6-9
Settings for multiplexing trends
Multiplexing trend
variables
You can control trend variables, not only trends, by means of an index variable. A variable that writes to the trend buffer is assigned to every value of the
index variable.
Principle
Figure 6-10 shows the principle of multiplexing trend variables. Temperature

values Temp1 to Temp3 are stored in DB 10 on the PLC at addresses DW 37,
DW 39 and DW 41. Variables Var1 to Var3 are configured for these memory
addresses on the TP or OP. The value of index variable Var_A determines the
variable which writes values to the trend buffer.
With this type of multiplexing, it is possible to display a larger number of
process values as a trend, since a separate trend buffer is not created for every
trend.
6-24
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Temp1
Temp2
Temp3
DW 39
DW 41
PLC
DB 10 DW 37
TP or OP
Trend Graphic
Var1
Var2
0
Index variable Var_A
Var3
2
Buffer
Figure 6-10 Multiplexing Trends (Principle)
Settings
To multiplex a trend variable, click in the Trend Graphic dialog box on the
Edit... button and then, in the Trend dialog box which is opened, on the
Multiplex... button (refer to Figure 6-11).
Figure 6-11 Settings for Multiplexing Trend Variables
Assign the variables, from which you want the values to be read for the trend,
to the values of the index variable.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-25
Screens
6.4.1
Trends
Reading trend data
Trends can be triggered by a clock pulse or a bit. Just one trend value is read
from a variable for every clock pulse or trigger. The Samples/max. of the
trend are stored on the TP or OP. Once the maximum number of samples of a
trend has been reached, the oldest value is overwritten every time there is a
new value.
Purpose
Trends are suitable for displaying continuous variations such as the operating
temperature of a motor.
Setting a trigger
At Trigger, set Clock Pulse for the clock-triggered trends,and Bit and
value for bit-triggered trends. In this case, you have to define the two following bit areas which the TP or OP and the PLC use to communicate with
each other:
trend request area and
trend transfer area 1
You define these areas by choosing System Area Pointers from the menu.
A specific trigger bit is assigned to every trend in all the bit areas. If, for example, trigger bit 4 has been assigned to a trend, the trend is identified in all
the bit areas by bit 4. The bit areas are described in Section 6.4.2, Pattern
Trends.
Example
The fill levels of Tank_A, Tank_B, Tank_Cand Mixer are required to be

recorded every 1.5 seconds and displayed in a combined trend graphic. The
TP or OP is required to display 24 values simultaneously (Figure 6-12).
Step
1
Action
First define the common settings in the Trend Graphic dialog
box:
Samples/max.
24
Background Color
White
Scale Color
Black
X Axis
- Display Axis
- Labeling: Samples/ max.
- Display Axis
Y Axis
- Labeling
- Scale
Max: Constant
Min: Constant
6-26
2000
0
Then specify the first trend. In the Trendfield, enter Tank_A and
click Edit. Perform the following settings in the Trend dialog
box:
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Step
Action
Display
Samples
Color
Trigger
Lines
24
Red
Clock pulse
1.5 seconds
Specify at Variable the point at which the TP or OP is required to

read the values for trend Tank_A. Enter:
Name
Contents_A
Type
KF
DB
10
DW
4
PLC
PLC_1
Confirm with OK.
3
Apply the configured trend to the trend graphic by choosing Add.
Perform the settings for the three trends Tank_B, Tank_C and
Mixer in a similar way to that for Tank_A. Assign a different
color and/or display to every trend to distinguish the trends
clearly from one another.
Make sure when you are configuring that you use the same trigger type and trigger pulse for all the trends in the trend graphic.
Figure 6-12 Configuring a Trend
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-27
Screens
Interrupting
plotting of trend
data
If you interrupt operation of the TP or OP while clock-triggered trends are

being plotted, the X axis labeled with the time is updated immediately upon
resumption of operation. The trend values are updated at the configured clock
rate, however, and do not therefore correspond to the displayed time values
for the time being. For this reason the vertical bar displayed on the screen is
shown on the trend graphic when plotting resumes. The bar represents the
time of interruption and migrates continuously from the trend graphic at the
configured clock rate.
Interruption
100
0
0
6-28
60
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.4.2
Pattern Trends
Reading trend data
With pattern trends, all the trend values are read simultaneously out of a buffer on the PLC by setting a trigger bit and are displayed on the TP or OP as a
trend. The variable associated with the trend contains the start address of the
buffer. The length of the buffer is not explicitly entered. It results from the
number of Samples/max. that are configured in the trend.
Purpose
Pattern trends can be used for quickly changing values, for example, when
only the overall variation the pattern is of interest. If the values change
more quickly than they can be communicated between the TP or OP and the
PLC, the values have to be saved on the PLC. The TP or OP then reads out
the whole buffer at once. One example of using pattern trends is injection
pressure in manufacturing plastic components.
Setting trigger
For pattern trends, you set under Trigger both Bit and Buffer. Since
pattern trends are triggered by a trigger bit, define at least the two bit areas
trend request area and
trend transfer area 1
which are used by the TP or OP and the PLC to communicate with each
other. The numbers located in the bit areas (Figures 6-13 and 6-14) represent
the trigger bit for the trend.
Trend request area
15
31
0
16
Trend transfer area 1

Trend indicator bit
15
1 0
31
16
Figure 6-13 Bit Areas for Trends with the SIMATIC S5
Trend request area

1
16
17
32

1
17
16
32
Trend indicator bit
Figure 6-14 Bit Areas for Trends with the SIMATIC 500/505
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-29
Screens
Set these bit areas by choosing System Area Pointers from the menu and
create them on the PLC. A specific trigger bit is assigned to every trend in all
the bit areas. If, for example, trigger bit 4 has been assigned to a trend, the
trend is identified in all the bit areas by bit 4.
Using array
variables
You can configure array variables for pattern trends. You set the size of the
trend buffer by the number of elements. The number must be the same as the
number of samples you set in the Trend dialog box at Samples.
The pattern trend is represented by the array variable. If you use these array
variables in a recipe (refer to Chapter 8), you can back up the pattern trend,
just like any other data record on the TP or OP, to a data medium and read
them in again.
Displaying trends
If a screen containing one or more trends is opened on the TP or OP, the TP

or OP sets the corresponding bits in the trend request area. In the PLC program, set the bit assigned to the trend in the trend transfer area and the trend
indicator bit. The TP or OP detects the trigger and resets the trend bit and the
trend indicator bit. Depending on the configuration, it then reads out a single
value or the whole buffer.
Switch buffer
If the process represented by the pattern trend restarts while the TP or OP is

still reading from the buffer, values will be overwritten. To avoid this, a second buffer is created for the same trend. The second buffer has to be set in
the configuration. To do this, you set under Trigger both Bit and Switch
Buffer. You also have to create a bit area for buffer 2, trend transfer
area 2. It is structured in exactly the same as trend transfer area 1.
While the TP or OP is reading the values from Buffer 1, the PLC writes the
new values to Buffer 2. If the TP or OP reads Buffer 2, the PLC writes to
Buffer 1. Figure 6-15 illustrates this process.
Buffer 1
Buffer 2
PLC writes
TP or OP
reads
Trend buffer is full, the bit is
set in trend transfer area 1
Figure 6-15 Switch Buffer
6-30
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Example of
SIMATIC S5
The configuration of a pattern curve with the necessary settings is explained

in the following by means of an example. Figure 6-16 shows the different bit
areas and the steps that have to be performed by the TP or OP and the PLC.
The trend is called Trend_4, since trigger bit 4 is assigned to it.
Trend:
Trigger
Bit
Pulse
Value
Trigger Bit:
4
Buffer
Variable =
Switch Buffer
Variable
Var_54
DB54, DW 40
Trend request area
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0

Trend indicator bit
1
Buffer 4:
DB54, DW40
10
Trend_4
5
0.5
Figure 6-16 Interrelationships between Configuration and Display of Pattern Curves
Let us assume the screen is called on which Trend_4 is configured. In the

trend request area, the TP or OP then sets bit 4 to 1. If buffer 4 is full, the
PLC sets bit 4 in trend transfer area 1 to 1. As soon as the trend indicator bit
is set, the TP or OP then reads buffer 4, whose address is contained in variable VAR_54. The buffer is located on the PLC.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-31
Screens
6.5
Buttons (for TPs)
Purpose
Touch panels do not have conventional keyboards. You operate the device
intuitively by touching configured buttons and input fields on the touch-sensitive screen (touch screen).
You can use buttons to customize your user interface on the TP. The screen
displays only the currently required operating elements.
Touch grid
The touch grid is device-dependent. It identifies the smallest possible spacing

between two points on the touch screen which the TP recognizes as separate
points when touched. The size of a button is always a multiple of the touch
grid. You can position the buttons on the screen anywhere you like within
this grid. Enable and disable the display of the touch grid by choosing Screen
Surface from the menu.
Buttons must not overlap. Neither must buttons and input fields overlap. An
overlap is rejected during compilation and an error message is issued.
When you are positioning buttons, take into account the places where message windows and input windows are opened on the TP. Figure 6-17 shows an
example of screen partitioning on the TP37.
System messages
Button (global)
Fixed window
Event messages and
alarm messages
Message indicator
Input window
Basic area
Help window
Button (local)
Figure 6-17 Basic Screen Partitioning on a Touch Panel
6-32
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Global and local

buttons
Since you configure buttons for every screen, the functions assigned to them
only available locally on the screen concerned, just like the button itself. Position the buttons which you want to be available globally on all screens, in
the fixed window of the touch panel.
Configuring
buttons
Section 6.5.1 will tell you how to configure buttons with a freely definable
function. You will hen learn in Section 6.5.2 how to use predefined buttons
featuring a permanent function.
6.5.1
Buttons with Freely Definable Function
Defining buttons
Configure buttons featuring a freely definable function by choosing Screen

Fields Button
Figure 6-18 shows the dialog box. Define functionality and appearance of the
button by choosing Functions..., Attributes... and Colors...:
Figure 6-18 Button Dialog Box
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-33
Screens
Functions
The functions you set here are executed when you press the button on the TP.
All the functions you can assign to the function keys on keyboard-driven OPs
are available here as well. In addition, you can select functions which are
available especially for TPs, such as Display Information Text. You will find
an overview of all the functions in ProTool in Appendix A.
Under Conditions..., you can set the function should be initiated. Depending on the function, you have a choice between
Press button
The function is triggered as soon as you press the button (default setting).
Release button
The function is triggered as soon as the button that was touched is released for example Select Screen.
Repeat button
The function is triggered as soon as you press the button. If you continue
to touch the button, the function is repeated following a brief delay until
the button is released for example, variable: Value Minus/Plus.
If you do not assign a function to the button, it is shown as a light indicator
(refer to section 6.5.2).
Attributes
You can use dynamic attributes to configure a change of color, for example.
To do this, define different foreground and background colors for various
values of the multiplex variable. Similarly, you can enable and disable the
Flash attribute for the button labeling.
You will find an example of configuring dynamic attributes in Section 6.2.2.
Note
The same multiplex variable is used to control dynamic attributes and for the
text or graphic list. This means that the value of the multiplex variable specifies the attribute used (color, flashing) and points simultaneously to the entry
that is to be displayed in the text or graphic list.
6-34
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
Colors
Here you set the colors for the foreground (text), the background (button) and
the border. The change of border color on the TP produces a 3-D effect when
the button is touched:
Start
Untouched
Start
Touched
Note
Avoid using white as the color for the border if the button has a white background; if white is used, part of the border will not be visible.
Type
You can use the basic element, button, to create individually all the elements
that you require for operating the TP. The sole basic difference between the
buttons is whether or not they are subsequently visible on the device.
Visible buttons
are used to configure conventional control components, such as keys,
switches, light indicators etc.
Invisible buttons
are visible only during configuration. If, for example, you assign invisible
buttons to your process screen by means of individual components, you
can operate these components for example, a valve simply by touching the corresponding area on the screen of the TP.
Within the configuration, you can enable and disable the display of invisible buttons on the toolbar by means of
Display
Depending on its intended use, a button may display text or a graphic. Text
and graphics may be static or be subject to dynamic modification as a function of the value of a variable.
Text
Text is centered on a button. If the text does not fit on a single line, a line
break is inserted. Text that does not completely fit on the button for length
reasons is truncated on the right.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
6-35
Screens
Select the display type
String
if you want to label the button with static text. Enter the text under Label.
Text Symbol
if you want the button label to be subject to dynamic modification as a
function of the value of the multiplex variable. You can create an existing
text list or create a new list by choosing Text or Graphic List. You will
find an example of a text list in Section 6.2.1.
Clicking these symbols allows you to scroll through the current text
list. You can view the button and its text in the preview window. Dynamic
attributes are not taken into account in the preview window.
Graphics
Graphics are adapted to the size of the button if it is not already being used
elsewhere in the configuration. You can learn how to avoid unwanted distortions in Section 6.1.3.
Select the display type
Graphic
if you want the button to display a static graphic. You can select an existing graphic or create a new one at Graphics.
Graphic symbol
if you want the button to display different graphics as a function of the
value of the multiplex variable. You can create an existing graphic list or
create a new list by choosing Text or Graphic List. You will find an example of a graphic list in Section 6.2.1.
Clicking these symbols allows you to scroll through the current graphic list. You can view the button and its graphic in the preview window.
Dynamic attributes are not taken into account in the preview window.
Password level
6-36
You can configure a password level for every button to prevent operation by
unauthorized persons. The default setting is 0. As soon as you touch a button
on the TP that is configured for a password level > 0, you are prompted to
enter a password.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.5.2
Buttons Featuring a Fixed Function
Overview
Set/Reset Bit
For fast and efficient configuration of standard functions, ProTool features

predefined buttons having the following features:
Set/Reset Bit
Select Screen
Light Indicator
Screen Fields Set/Reset Bit on menu
At this point you configure a button which you use to set or reset a bit in a
variable on the TP. Figure 6-19 shows the dialog box.
Figure 6-19 Set/Reset Bit Dialog Box
Depending on the type of variable and on the settings in the Set, Reset,
Set/Reset and Set when Key is Pressed check boxes, one of the following
functions is automatically assigned to the button:
Setting
Condition
Set
Set Bit
Set Bit in Word
Press key
Reset
Reset Bit
Reset Bit in Word
Press key
Set/Reset
Set/Reset Bit
Set/Reset Bit in
Word
Press key
Set Bit when Key is

Pressed
Press/Release Button
Set when Key is

Pressed
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Function for Variable Type

BOOL
KF / INT
6-37
Screens
Select Screen
Screen Fields Select Screen on menu

At this point you configure a button which you use to select another screen
on the TP. The names of the configured screens are shown in the Screen
selection box. The function is triggered as soon as you touch the button.
Figure 6-20 Select Screen Dialog Box
Light indicator
Screen Fields Light indicator on menu

Light indicators are inoperable display elements on the TP. They indicate the
state of a defined bit by the assignment of dynamic attributes for example,
by means of a change in color or flashing text. No function is assigned to a
light indicator. To distinguish them visually from operable buttons, light
indicators are displayed with a single border. Figure 6-21 shows the dialog
box.
Figure 6-21 Light IndicatorDialog Box
6-38
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.5.3
Direct Keys
Purpose
Buttons can also be used as direct keys to enable shortcuts on the TP

without communication-related delays. Shortcuts are a requirement for typing
mode, for example.
Types of direct key
Basically, you can configure two different types of direct key:

PROFIBUS direct keys
direct keys for driving the direct key module
You cannot simultaneously use PROFIBUS direct keys and direct keys for
driving direct key module within the same project.
PROFIBUS direct
keys
You use PROFIBUS direct keys to set bits in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S7
directly on the TP. The bit area is defined in STEP 7. The bit is set when the
direct key is touched and reset upon releasing the key or upon leaving the
screen.
Requirements
1. On compiling the configuration, ProTool was installed as integrated.

2. The touch panel is connected during operation to a SIMATIC S7 over the
PROFIBUS-DP.
3. You have defined the bit area for direct keys in STEP 7 (for configuration
refer to the Communication Users Guide).
If these requirements are not met, ProTool interprets the configured button as
a direct key for driving the direct key module. The number of PROFIBUS
bits that can be manipulated by means of direct keys differs from device to
device:
Device
No. of Bits
TP37
40 (0 to 39)
TP27
24 (0 to 23)
Direct keys for

direct key module
You can use these direct keys to drive the ports of the optional direct key module at the rear of the TP. The port is set when the direct key is touched and
reset upon releasing the key or upon leaving the screen.
Requirements
The TP is fitted with a direct key module and the requirements for
PROFIBUS direct keys have been met. The number of ports that you can
configure differs from device to device:
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Device
No. of Ports
TP37
16 (1 to 16)
TP27
8 (1 to 8)
6-39
Screens
Configuring direct
keys
Step
Action
Configure a button by choosing

Screen Fields Button from the menu.
At Function, assign the Direct Key function to the button.
Specify the port number at Parameters and the number of the bit
which you want to have set when the key is pressed.
ProTool interprets the number you enter as the PROFIBUS bit
number if the following conditions are fulfilled simultaneously:
On compiling the configuration, ProTool was installed as
integrated.
The touch panel is connected during operation to a
SIMATIC S7 over the PROFIBUS-DP.
You have defined the bit area for direct keys in STEP 7.
If these conditions are not met, the number you enter is interpreted as the port number for the direct key module. If the number is larger than the number of available ports, an error message
is issued upon compilation.
Note
The Direct Key function can only be used once per button.
Do not position any direct keys in the fixed window.
Do not configure a trend graphic
on a screen featuring direct keys
in the fixed window of a configuration containing direct keys
PROFIBUS screen
number
If PROFIBUS direct keys use identical bits for different functions on different screens, the S7 has to distinguish the functionality by means of the
screen number. To avoid a delay in updating the screen number on the PLC
following a change of screen, there is the PROFIBUS Screen Number screen
function.
Choosing Screen Attributes from the menu, assign the PROFIBUS Screen
Number function to the screen. Specify a PROFIBUS bit as the parameter
that will be reserved for the screen number and set when the button is
pressed. If you assign this function several times over, you can define a bit
pattern for the screen number.
The bits are set when the screen is opened and reset upon leaving the screen.
The screen number bits are transferred to the SIMATIC S7 at the same speed
as direct key bits.
6-40
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Screens
6.6
Detecting a Called Screen on the PLC
Usage
To be able to detect on the PLC the screen that has just been called on the TP
or OP, you have to create a Screen Number area on the PLC. The TP or OP
stores information in the screen number area about the screen called on the
TP or OP.
In this way it is possible to transfer information on the current contents of the
display on the TP or OP to the PLC. Certain reactions can then be initiated in
the PLC program for example, calling another screen.
Condition
If you wish to use the screen number area, you have to specify it during configuration as Area Pointer Type Screen Number. It can be created only on
one PLC and once only.
The screen number area is transferred spontaneously to the PLC; in other
words, a transfer takes place whenever a change is registered on the TP or
OP. There is therefore no need to configure a polling time.
Structure
The screen number area is a data area having a fixed length of five data
words. The structure of the screen number area is displayed below.
Address
1st word
Current screen type
2nd word
Current screen number
3rd word
Reserved
4th word
Current input field number

Reserved
5th word
Entry
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Assignment
Current screen type
1: screen
Current screen number
1 to 65535
Current input field number
0 to 65535
6-41
Screens
6-42
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Messages
Message types
Messages show events and states in the control process on the TP or OP.
ProTool differentiates between two different types of message:
Event messages
Alarm messages,
Event messages and alarm messages are initiated by the PLC. They contain
information about events and states in the control process. After the have been
issued, messages are stored on the TP or OP in separate message buffers.
Stored messages can be displayed on the TP or OP and printed on an attached
printer.
Variables
A message consists of static text and/or variables. Text and variables can be
freely configured. To use variables in a message, you insert an output field.
Assigning
functions
Messages can be assigned to functions. While you are configuring, you set the
functions which you require to be triggered upon specific events. Events are
the arrival of a message
acknowledgement of the message (with alarm messages only)
the departure of the message.
You select functions in the attribute window of the message editor.
Printout
So that you can print messages on your printer, you have to check in your configuration the Print attribute in the Attribute Window of the message editor for
every message you want to have printed. If you choose System Messages
Settings form the menu, you can perform the following settings for message
logging:
Messages:
Logging of all events is enabled.
Overflow:
When the message buffer is full, the TP or OP deletes messages before new
messages are entered. If the Overflow field is checked, all the messages are
printed prior to deletion. This is done irrespective of whether the Print attribute has been set.
Off:
Message logging is disabled.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
7-1
Messages
Overflow warning
If you select the Overflow Warning field by choosing System Messages

Settings from the menu, a warning is issued on the TP or OP as soon as the
configured remaining space is reached or exceeded. You can set the remaining
buffer size. The default setting is 10%.
Relay/port
A message can directly set one of the following two outputs on the TP or OP:
relay
port (with TPs or OPs with direct key module only).
Message priority
You can set the priority of a configured message in the attribute window of the
messages editor Priority. If several messages are queued simultaneously, they
are displayed in the configured message priority order. You can configure message priorities between 1 (lowest) and 16 (top).
Message areas
You have to define in your configuration an event message area for event messages and an alarm message area for alarm messages. You set the message
areas by choosing System Area Pointers from the menu.
An event message and an alarm message can be configured for every bit in the
configured message area. When the address area concerned is being configured, the number of messages which may be created in it is displayed.
Every message area can be divided into several address areas. Table 7-1 shows
the number of message areas, alarm acknowledgement areas and the overall
length of all areas.
Table 7-1
Message Areas of the TPs or OPs Featuring Graphics Displays

Event Message Area
Message number
7-2
Alarm Message Area and Alarm

Acknowledgement Area
Total
Length (Words)
Total per
Type
Overall Length per Type

(Words)
125
125
The message numbers are listed in the left margin of the message editor. A bit
number is assigned to every message number. This means that you can immediately see the bit to which a configured message belongs in the event message
area or the alarm message area. Further, the status bar displays the address to
which the message belongs.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Messages
Assigning
message area and
message number
The assignment of message areas and message numbers is illustrated below by

means of examples.
Example 1: SIMATIC S5 (data words)
Let us assume that the following event message area has been configured for
the SIMATIC S5 PLC:
DB 60
Address 43 Length 5 (in DW)
Figure 7-1 shows the assignment of bit numbers and message numbers for data
words. Message numbers and bit numbers are assigned automatically on the TP
or OP.
Bit 15
Data word 43 16
Data word 47
0
1
65
80
Message number
Figure 7-1
SIMATIC S5: Message Area and Message Number Assignment for Data
Words
Example 2: SIMATIC S5 (flag words)

You can also define the message area in flag words. Let us assume that the
following alarm message area has been defined in the example that follows:
FW 50
Length 2 (in FW)
Figure 7-2 shows the assignment of message numbers and bit numbers for flag
words.
Flag word 50
Flag 50
Flag 51
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Flag word 52
Flag 52
Flag 53
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Flag No.
F51.0
...
F51.7
F50.0
...
F50.7
F53.0
...
F53.7
F52.0
...
F52.7
Figure 7-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Message number
1
...
8
9
...
16
17
...
24
25
...
32
SIMATIC S5: Message Area and Message Number Assignment for Flag
Words
7-3
Messages
Example 3: SIMATIC 500/505

Let us assume that the following event message area has been configured for
the SIMATIC500/505 PLC:
V 43
Length 5(in DW)
Figure 7-3 shows the assignment of a total of 80 (5 x 16) message numbers to
the different bit numbers in the event message area of the PLC. The assignment
is performed automatically on the TP or OP.
Bit 1
V 43 1
V 47
65
16
16
80
Message number
Figure 7-3
Information text
SIMATIC 500/505: Message Bit and Message Number Assignment
You can configure different information text for every message. You can provide information for the operator, for example, in the information text of an
alarm message on the cause of a malfunction and troubleshooting. The operator can call this information using the Info key on OPs and the HELP button
on TPs when the message is waiting to be serviced on the TP or OP.
This is how you switch the message editor between message text and information text:
Messages Edit Information Text on the menu

Button
7-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Messages
7.1
Event Messages
Definition
Event messages display a status such as

Motor switched on
Motor off
Motor speed of xx/min reached
PLC to manual mode
Operating temperature of xx reached
With event messages, the status of a bit on the PLC is evaluated by the TP or
OP. If the bit is set on the PLC, an event message is initiated on the TP or OP.
You define what an event message is and which bits should trigger an event
message while you are configuring.
Standby message
If an event message is configured as No. 0, it is interpreted as a standby message. The standby message is displayed in the event message window when
event messages are not waiting. If you have configured a message line, the
standby message is always visible when messages are not waiting. The standby
message may consist of text only. A bit is not assigned in the message area to
the standby message.
Execution
If a bit is set in the message area in the PLC program, the TP or OP detects the
corresponding message as having arrived and displays it. If the bit is reset, the
TP or OP detects the message as having departed. The message is then not
displayed any more.
Example of
SIMATIC S5
In the following example, you first configure the event message area, followed
by an event message containing a field.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Step
Action
Choose System Area Pointers from the menu to create the event
message area. The Area Pointers dialog box is opened.
7-5
Messages
Step
Action
Select in the Type field the area pointer for Event Messages. Press
the Add key. The Event Messages dialog box is opened.
Enter:
DB:
10
DW:
0
Length:
2
PLC name:
PLC_1
4
5
6
7
You have now created an event message area for 32 event messages.
Confirm the settings by clicking OK. Exit from the Area Pointers
dialog box, likewise by choosing OK.
Call the editor for Event Messages.
Position the cursor on message No. 1.
Enter the following message:
Motor speed of {Var_2}/min reached
10
11
12
where {Var_2} is an output field.

To insert the output field, choose Messages Edit/Paste
Field from the menu. The Message Field dialog box is
opened.
Set:
Display:
Decimal
Field length:
4
Enter in the Variable field the symbolic name Var_2. Click Edit in
order to edit the variable. The Variable dialog box is opened.
Enter:
Type:
KF
DB:
10
DW:
3
PLC name:
PLC_1
Exit from the Variable and Message Field dialog boxes by choosing OK.
The figure shows the configured event message.
13
7-6
By choosing Messages WYSIWYG Mode from the menu,

you can toggle the display mode of the output field between
symbol and WYSIWYG.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Messages
7.2
Alarm Messages
Definition
Alarm messages display an operating fault such as

Motor temperature too high
Coolant empty
Valve will not open
fault, compressor 4
Switch M208 open
With alarm messages, the status of a bit on the PLC is evaluated by the TP or
OP. If the bit is set on the PLC, an alarm message is initiated on the TP or OP.
You define what an alarm message is and which bits should trigger an alarm
message while you are configuring.
Acknowledging
Since alarm messages are used to display extraordinary operating states, they
have to be acknowledged. Alarm messages are acknowledged either by an operator input on the TP or OP or by the PLC.
Execution
If a bit is set in the alarm message area in the PLC program, the TP or OP detects the corresponding message as having arrived and displays it. If the bit is
reset, the TP or OP detects the message as having departed. Only when the
message is acknowledged on the TP or OP is it no longer displayed.
Acknowledgement
areas
If you require the PLC to be informed when an alarm message has been acknowledged or if the PLC itself is to be able to acknowledge alarm messages,
you have to create the following acknowledgement areas by choosing System
Area Pointers.
PLC Acknowledgement
A bit set by the PLC in this area causes the corresponding alarm message to
be acknowledged on the TP or OP.
The PLC Acknowledgement acknowledgement area
must be contiguous without the corresponding alarm message area
must have the same polling time as the alarm message area
can have a maximum length equal to that of the corresponding alarm
message area.
OP Acknowledgement
A bit set by the PLC in this area by an operator input on the TP or OP sends
an acknowledgement of the corresponding alarm message to the PLC. The
OP Acknowledgement acknowledgement area must not be longer than the
corresponding alarm message area.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
7-7
Messages
Assigning
acknowledge bits
to message
numbers
The same bit x of the alarm message area and the same bit x of the acknowledgement area are assigned to every alarm message number. Normally, the acknowledgement area have the same length as the alarm message area and must
be contiguous with the alarm message area.
Acknowledgement
groups
When you are configuring alarm messages, you can place several messages
together to form an acknowledgement group. In this way, when the first alarm
message is acknowledged for example, the cause of the fault all the other
alarm messages of the same acknowledgement group (consequential faults) are
acknowledged at the same time.
For this, assign in the attribute window of the message editor a value between
0 and 16 to every alarm message under Acknowledgment. A blank field is
equivalent to entering 0. A value of 0 results in single acknowledgement; this
means that when an alarm message is acknowledged only that alarm message
is acknowledged. If you acknowledge any alarm message of acknowledgement
groups 1 through 16, all the alarm messages in that group are acknowledged
simultaneously (group acknowledgement).
Display options
By choosing System Messages Settings from the menu you set whether
the first or last alarm message to arrive is shown on the display. To do this,
select one of the fields First or Last. This setting is important whenever there
are several messages waiting at any one time.
Example of
SIMATIC S5
In this example, you first configure the alarm message area, followed by an
alarm message.
7-8
Step
Action
Choose System Area Pointers from the menu to create the alarm
message area. The Area Pointers dialog box is opened.
Select the area pointer for Alarm Messages in the Type field. Press
the Add key. The Alarm Messages dialog box is opened.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Messages
Step
3
Action
Enter:
DB:
DW:
Length:
PLC name:
10
2
2
PLC_1
You have now created an alarm message area for 32 alarm

messages.
4
Confirm the settings by clicking OK. Exit from the Area Pointers
dialog box, likewise by choosing OK.
Call the editor for Alarm Messages.
Position the cursor on message No. 1.
Enter the following message:

Motor temperature too high
Perform the following settings in the attribute window:

Priority:
1
Acknowledge: 8
Print:
x
The figure shows the configured alarm message.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
7-9
Messages
7.3
Copying Messages
Overview
You can copy individual pieces of message text or complete messages, including all attributes, fields, information text etc. Copying is possible
within a message editor the alarm message editor, for
between the alarm message editor and the event message editor
from one project to another
from one device to another (text-based display/graphics display)
You will find detailed information on copying from one project to another in
Section 4.5.
Copying message
text
Step
Action
Select the message text you wish to copy.
Copy the text you selected onto the Clipboard by choosing

Edit Copy from the menu.
Paste the text at the position where you want it to be by

choosing Edit Paste.
If selected text contains output fields, they are also pasted together
with the selected text. If you have configured message text in
different languages, repeat steps 1 to 3 for every configured
language.
Copying complete
messages
Step
1
Action
Point the mouse at the message number.
The shape of the cursor changes to
Select the messages text you wish to copy.
Copy the messages you selected onto the Clipboard by

choosing Edit Copy from the menu.
Paste the text at the position where you want it to be by

choosing Edit Paste from the menu.
This type of copying contains the complete message, including all
output fields, information text, attributes, functions and languages.
Notes on copying
from one device to
another
7-10
Message text and information text are truncated, if necessary, to the format
of the destination device.
The number of output fields is determined by the destination device.
Symbolic fields of text-based displays are converted to numeric fields for
graphics displays.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Messages
7.4
Exporting and Importing Messages
Purpose
By choosing Edit Export from the menu, you can export configured event
messages and alarm messages as a text file to translate them, for example,
using an external editor into another language without ProToo.
By choosing Edit Import from the menu, you can import externally edited
messages back into your project.
Important
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
During the export process, only the symbolic names of variables are saved for
output fields. If you import the text file into a new configuration, all the variables that do not exist in the destination configuration are applied from the text
file with their symbolic names, but the link to the PLC is lost.
7-11
Messages
7-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Purpose
Recipes are groups of variables for a specific application. The purpose of

recipes is to download several items of data en bloc to the PLC. Furthermore,
the TP or OP and the PLC are synchronized.
Data records
The data structure is defined in the configuration by a recipe. Data are assigned
to the structure on the TP or OP. This data structure (recipe) can be used many
times and different data can be assigned to it. Recipes containing assigned data
are referred to as data records. Data records are stored on the TP or OP. In
this way you save storage space on the PLC.
Organization of
this chapter
The chapter is divided into a theoretical and practical part:

The theoretical part contains information on the structure of a recipe and
what you should bear in mind.
The practical part tells you, by showing examples, how to configure a recipe, how to create a data record and how to download it to the PLC.
If you wish to become familiar with recipes by referring to an example, go
straight to Section 8.3.
Note on TPs
Examples and illustrations of standard screens refer to keyboard OPs. All

descriptions apply by analogy to touch panels as well. Take note of the special
features applicable to touch panel configuration.
Example of a
recipe
A practical example of a recipe is the bottling machine of a fruit juice system.

Let us assume that orange nectar, an orange juice drink and orange juice all
have to be produced on the same bottling machine. The ratios of mixture differ
from drink to drink. The ingredients are always the same.
We create a recipe called Mixture, containing the following data structure:
Var_23
Name
Var_11
l Orange
Var_7
l Water
Var_19
kg Sugar
Var_21
g Flavor
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
8-1
Recipes
The data records now contain the values for the different drinks. The data records might look as follows:
Orange Drink
Name
l Orange
l Water
kg Sugar
g Flavor
Ingredients of a
recipe
Drink
90
10
1.5
200
Orange Nectar
Name
l Orange
l Water
kg Sugar
g Flavor
Nectar
70
30
1.5
400
Orange Juice
Name
l Orange
l Water
kg Sugar
g Flavor
Juice
95
5
0.5
100
A recipe comprises several variables and their names, called entry names. Entry names are displayed on the TP or OP. This means that a variable can be
identified, such as l Orange in the preceding example, to denote orange as a
constituent part of the mixture. Figure 8-1 shows the dialog box used to create
recipes.
Figure 8-1
Recipe Dialog Box
The current values of variables are saved on the TP or OP by storing the data
records.
Variables used in recipes may also occur in other objects such as screens. The
following example shows one application.
Example
8-2
There are separate screens containing a storage tank, valves, quantity consumed and other details for all of the ingredients, i.e. orange, water etc. The
screens contain input fields for setting the intake amounts for the mixer. This
means that the ratios of mixture may vary from screen to screen. The mixer is
then turned on. This process has to be repeated for every fruit juice. This process is beneficial when, for example, the system is undergoing commissioning.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Identical variables
on screens and
recipes
If the variables of input fields are combined to form a recipe, mixtures for the
different fruit juices that have been completed can be stored by creating data
records on the TP or OP. Figure 8-2 illustrates how variables are used on
screens and in a recipe.
If you now wish to produce a specific fruit juice, the corresponding data record
is downloaded to the PLC. This means that the requisite values are assigned to
all of the variables.
Mixer
Screen_1
Var_23
Stock of orange
Screen_2
Var_11
Stock of water
Screen_3
Screen_4
Var_7
Stock of sugar
Recipe
Var_23
Var_11
Var_7
Var_19
Var_21
Name
l Orange
l Water
kg Sugar
g Flavor
Var_19
Screen_5
Stock of flavor
Var_21
Figure 8-2
Identical Variables on Screens and in the Recipe
Note
Variables that are linked to the PLC are treated in recipes as follows:
If a variable is used in a recipe and if it is also assigned to an output field on a
screen, the PLC can overwrite the instantaneous value.
This occurs, for example, when data records are uploaded from the data medium to the PLC. In this instance, the variables on the PLC are updated first
and then the values are uploaded to the TP or OP. In the meantime, however,
the output field variable may have been updated by the PLC. The PLC value is
uploaded, not the data record value.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
8-3
Recipes
8.1
Creating Recipes
Identifying a recipe
on the TP or OP
A recipe is stored under a symbolic name in your configuration. You also select the recipe by its symbolic name on the TP or OP. The recipe is simultaneously numbered, the number being specific to that configuration. You can
modify the recipes name and number by choosing the Attributes button in the
Recipes dialog box.
Identifying a recipe
on the PLC
There are three identifications available for identifying a recipe on the PLC.
You enter the identifications in the Parameters dialog box. The identifications
can be defined freely. ProTool automatically enters the recipe number in the
first identification. Only these identifications are written to the PLC when a
data record is downloaded.
Identifying a data
record
You create a data record with a symbolic name on the TP or OP. This name
applies only to the TP or OP. When a data record is downloaded, only the data
and the identifications of the recipe are downloaded. For the PLC, there is no
particular identification available for the data record apart from the recipe identification. If you wish to identify the data record on the PLC, create in the recipe a variable containing the name of the data record.
Using variables
Only certain settings are meaningful for variables used in recipes. In addition,
the settings impact on the download operation.
Array variables
If you configure array variables for pattern trends (refer to Section 6.4.2) and
embed these variables in a recipe, you can save the pattern trends, just like any
other data record on the TP or OP, on a data medium and read them in again.
You cannot edit the variable array in the data record.
Permissible
variable in recipes
Pay special attention to the following when entering data records on the TP or
OP:
Enter the values of variables either in decimal notation or as a string.

With string type variables, you can edit as many as twenty-seven characters.
Note
There is little point in using timer and counter types of variable in recipes.
8-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Setting variable
attributes
Variables used in recipes must have an address on the PLC and the attribute
Write Directly. Only variables of this type are downloaded to the PLC
when a data record is downloaded. Variables not having an address are not included in the download operation. The attributes are set in the Variable dialog
box by pressing the Options button.
Figure 8-3 shows the Variable and Options dialog boxes with the corresponding settings.
Figure 8-3
Variable and Options Dialog Boxes
Standard screens
for recipes
For creating, saving and downloading data records on the TP or OP, two standard screens Z_RECORD_1 and Z_RECORD_2 are available. If you wish
to use these screens on the TP or OP, you have to be able to call them. Both
screens are available in their standard configuration but are not embedded as
yet. Embed the standard screens in your configuration by assigning the Select
Screen function, say, to a function key. Specify the parameter as standard
screen Z_RECORD_1 or Z_RECORD_2. If you wish to use both standard
screens, you must assign them to separate function keys.
Text or graphic list

for recipes
After you have created the first recipe, a text or graphic list called
Z_RECIPES is created. This text or graphic list is used on the standard
screens supplied for data records. The order in which the recipes are entered in
the text list is determined by the recipe number. You can also see this order on
the TP or OP when you select a recipe.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
8-5
Recipes
Data mailbox
To download data records, you have to create a data mailbox by choosing

System Area Pointers. The TP or OP writes the identifications and the
length of the data record to the data mailbox. This is why the data mailbox
must have a length of at least five words. The following figure shows the
structure of the data mailbox.
Data word
Identification 1
1st word
Identification 2
2nd word
3rd word
Identification 3
Reserved
4th word
5th word Length of the data record in words
Setting the recipe

structure
If you have finished the configuration, you should fixthe structure of your
recipe. To do this, go via the Recipe dialog box to the Attributes dialog box.
Fixing a structure is synonymous with write protect. The structure of the recipe
can be modified from now on only under certain conditions. You can still delete variables but a gap remains in the structure. You can add variables only at
the end of the structure.
Fixing the structure insures that once data records have been created on the TP
or OP they can be re-used.
Using symbols
If you check in the Attributes dialog box the Use symbols check box, the symbolic names of variables are similarly saved in the data record when you create
data records. This means that data records can still be read in on the TP or OP
following a change in the recipe structure.
If you do not check the Use symbols check box, the values are not saved. The
symbolic names of variables are not saved in the data record. If the structure
were to be modified later, values would be interpreted incorrectly.
8-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
8.2
Downloading Data Records
Important
When data records are uploaded from the data medium to the PLC, the data are
written initially to the variables in working memory of the TP or OP and then
downloaded from there to the PLC. If the attribute Read Continuously
has been configured for the variables that have to be downloaded, or if the variables have been configured as actual values on the current screen, the variables might be overwritten by current PLC values. In this case, the data which
have been updated in the meantime are downloaded to the PLC, not the data
read from the data medium.
A detailed description of how to create data records and to download them to
the PLC will be found in the equipment manual for your TP or OP.
8.2.1
Downloading Data Records by Means of an Operator Input on the

TP or OP (Standard Case)
In this section
This section describes downloading data records from the TP or OP to the PLC
and uploading them in the reverse direction. This is the standard case. Special
cases are described in the Communication Users Manual. We recommend you
download and upload data records only by means of an operator input on the
TP or OP. For this purpose, use the standard screen Z_RECORD_1.
Setting the type of

download
To set the download type, go from the Recipes dialog box to the Parameters
dialog box. Here you have to set Direct as the download type.
With direct download from the OP PLC, the values of the variables are
written to the addresses on the PLC. The identifications are written to the data
mailbox. Variables not having an address are not downloaded.
With direct upload from the PLC OP, the values are read from the system
memories of the PLC and uploaded to the TP or OP.
Creating data
records
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Data records can be created on the TP or OP and then stored on a data medium.
The type of data medium you can use depends on the TP or OP. On standard
screen Z_RECORD_1, the text or graphic list Z_MEMORY containing the data
medium and value assignments is used.
0
Intern. flash
1
Module
Floppy disk
2
8-7
Recipes
Synchronization
during download
A major feature with recipes is that data downloading is synchronized and any
uncontrolled overwriting of data is inhibited. To insure a coordinated process
when data records are downloaded, bits are set in the control and check-back
areas of the interface area.
The interface area for SIMATIC PLCs is described in the Communication
Users Manual. For non-SIMATIC PLCs, the interface area is described in
Chapter 15.
8.2.2
Downloading and Uploading Data Records with a PLC Program
PLC job
Data records can be uploaded from the PLC to the TP or OP or downloaded by

means of PLC jobs 69 and 70. However, a PLC job merely writes to the variables or reads from the variables. A data record cannot be stored directly on the
data medium by means of a PLC job, nor is reading from the data medium
directly possible. An operator input on the TP or OP is required to do this.
Function replaces
PLC job
ProTool features functions to
read data records from the PLC and to store them on the data medium on
the TP or OP
read data records from the data medium and download them to the PLC.
This kind of function has to be assigned to a variable. The parameters of the
function contain the recipe name and the data record name. Assign the function
parameters from the PLC first. The function is triggered by the PLC modifying
the value of the variable.
Example
A detailed description is given in the example below of the steps you have to
perform for OP PLC download operations. The procedure for the PLC
OP direction is similar.
Condition
It is assumed in this example that you are basing your work on the standard
configuration. A few text lists and the corresponding variables, which you
should use, have already been created in the standard configuration.
8-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Assigning the
DAT OP/PLC
function
The DAT OP/PLC function has to be attached to a variable. For the function
parameters, use variables which are already in use for the Z_Record_1
standard screen.
Step
Action
Create a variable having the symbolic name VAR_212. The format of the variable may be KF and the variable may be linked to
the PLC.
Click the Options button under Variable. Place a check mark in the
Read Continuously check box under Attributes. The TP or
OP only detects whether the value of the variable has changed.
Exit from the Options dialog box by pressing OK.
Click the Functions button under Variable.
Select the DAT OP/PLC function. Insert the function using the
>> button into the Selected Functions field.
Select Parameters and assign the parameters as follows. In doing

so, always choose the variable specified under Variable. The figure
shows the dialog box with the parameters :
Data medium
Data record name
Information text
Recipe
Edit mode
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Z_MEMORY
Z_DATRNAME
Z_DATRINFO
Z_RECIPE
0
8-9
Recipes
Step
Action
Assigning a variable address on the PLC

For you to be able to write to variables from the PLC, you must have a
link to the PLC.
7
Configure an address on the PLC for all the variables specified

under 6 above. In addition, assign the attribute Read
Continuously to all the variables by pressing the Options
button. Only when this attribute has been enabled does the TP or
OP detect any change in the variable.
Triggering the function

8
On the PLC, assign the following variables

Z_MEMORY
Z_DATRNAME
Z_DATRINFO
Z_RECIPE
with the recipe name and the data record name which you wish to
download from the TP or OP to the PLC.
In addition, specify the data medium. Comments are optional.
8-10
Now, change the value of the VAR_212 variable on the PLC. This
triggers the function attached to the variable. The data record is
now downloaded from the TP or OP to the PLC.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
8.3
Example of creating a recipe
This section
contains
This section shows you on a step-by-step basis how you
create a recipe
create data records on the TP or OP
download data records to the PLC.
Description
In this example, you will create a recipe for the mixing unit of a fruit juice
system. You wish to mix different fruit juices on the same system. The ingredients are identical, only the ratios of mixture are different. You first create a
recipe called Mixture, followed by a data record called Orange. This data
record contains the ratio of mixture for orange juice.
The data record is downloaded indirectly; this means that the data are written
to the data mailbox. While the data record is being downloaded, the TP or OP
sets bits in the control and check-back areas. You must then similarly set and
reset bits in the PLC program to re-enable the data mailbox.
Example system
You create the example recipe for an OP37, which is connected to the
SIMATIC S5 by means of AS511. The PLC is the AG115U with CPU 944.
Step
Action
Open the standard configuration OP37_S5.pdb. Save this configuration under a new name for example, QUICKMIX.PDB.
Set the SIMATIC S5 PLC with driver AS511 by choosing System

PLC from the menu. Keep the symbolic name PLC_1. Set the
CPU by clicking Parameters.
Creating a recipe
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Call the editor for recipes and create the recipe described below.
Create variable Var_23 as Type KC, since it contains the name of

the data record. The variable must have a length of four bytes. Give
the variable an address on the PLC for example, DB 12, DW 0,
length 4. Specify the PLC as PLC_1. This means that you can use
the variable on screens and in messages too.
8-11
Recipes
Step
Action
Do not modify the variables attributes, since they have already

been set correctly for recipes. Variables Var_11, Var_7, Var_19 and
Var_21 are type KF variables and all two bytes long. For the address, specify data block 12 too. With variable Var_19, specify the
digits behind the decimal point as 1. The order of the variables
determines the structure of the recipe.
The Length specification in the Recipe dialog box is the length in
bytes. The Offset specification sets the position in the structure. It is
similarly specified in bytes.
If you add to the offset of the last entry its length, you obtain the
overall length of the data record in bytes.
The figure shows the Mixture recipe.
Other settings
You now have to modify the name of the recipe, set the identification
and the type of download, and create the data mailbox.
6
Click in the Recipe dialog box on the Attributes button. At this

point, modify the name of the recipe to Mixture. Freeze the
structure of the recipe by clicking Fix. All the entries in the recipe
are now dimmed.
Exit from the dialog box by choosing OK.
8-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Step
7
Action
Click the Parameters button. The dialog box illustrated below appears. Set the type of download operation here by clicking Direct.
The recipe number has already been entered under Identifications.
Do not modify anything here. The identification of the recipe is
transferred every time a data record is downloaded.
Exit from the dialog box by choosing OK.

After you have created the first recipe, ProTool automatically
creates a text or graphic list called Z_RECIPES. The figure shows
the text or graphic list. This text list is used automatically on
screens Z_RECORD_1 and Z_RECORD_2. You do not have to
perform any more settings for it.
Choose System Area Pointers from the menu. Set the interface
area here. Click Add. Set the interface area here.
DB:
DW:
Length:
51
0
185
Under Type:, select Data Mailbox. Click the Add button again. Set
a data mailbox that is in data block DB 14, starts with DW 0 and is
five data words long. Create data block 14 with a length of at least
five data words in your PLC program as well.
The figure shows the settings which have just been described.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
8-13
Recipes
Step
Action
Linking screens
For you to be able to use standard screens on the OP37, you have to
embed them in your configuration.
9
Create a new screen. Select the Start Screen option under Screen
Attributes. Call the screen Start. Exit from the dialog by choosing OK.
10
Place the selection of standard screens on F13. To do this, click

F13.
Now select the Select Screen function and apply it by using the
double-headed arrow key to the right field.
Click the Parameters button. At Screen name, select standard
screen Z_SYSTEM_MENU. Exit from the dialog by choosing OK.
Create an icon featuring the word Standard for example, using Paintbrush or some other drawing program.
11
Assign to F15 the standard screen Z_RECORD_1 as described

under 10 above. Here again, create an icon using Paintbrush. Give
standard screen Z_RECORD_1 the name DAT_1.
12
Call screen Z_RECORD_1. Click F20. Select the Select Screen

function. Under Parameters, specify the Start screen. Using Paint,
for example, create an icon called ESC.
Downloading the configuration

13
8-14
Save your configuration by choosing File Save from the

menu. Connect the OP to the PC or PU by means of the
connecting cable.
Choose File Download from the menu and reply Yes
to the question whether you require the configuration to be
generated first.
After the configuration has been downloaded, you can see the start
screen on the OP37. The system message PLC does not
exist is displayed. Connect the OP to the CPU. The system
message then disappears.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Recipes
Step
Action
Creating a data record on the OP

You first select and format the data medium for example, FLASH
memory on the OP37. Then create a data record for the orange juice
mixture and save it on the data medium. The value of the variables is
now 0. Then edit the data record and enter the actual values.
14
From the start screen, call screen DAT_1. The illustration shows
the basic structure of standard screen Z_RECORD_1.
The FLASH data medium has already been set. Move the cursor to
the Format Data Medium field. Press ENTER twice. In reply to
the following queries, enter 0 for Yes in every instance.
Edit Data Record
Recipe:
Mixture
Data record name:
Juice
Comment:
(Text)
Sort:
AZ
Data medium:
flash memory
Symbolic
input
String
input
Symbolic
input
Symbolic
input
Format
ESC
Soft keys
15
The Mixture recipe has already been selected. You can define how
the data records are sorted by means of the symbolic input field
Sort:
sorting is not performed
alphabetical order A Z
reverse alphabetical order Z A
chronological, ascending order (date +)
chronological, descending order (date )
16
Move the cursor to the Data Record Name field. Now specify the
name Orange for the data record.
17
Choose F16 to edit the data record. First, the following prompt
appears:
Create new data record?
0 Yes / 1 No
Type 0 for Yes.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
8-15
Recipes
Step
18
Action
Move the cursor in succession to the different entries of the data
record. Enter the following values:
JUICE
95
5
0.5
100
19
Save the data record on the flash by pressing ENTER. Then press
0 for Yes.
Downloading a data record from the OP to the PLC

While the data record is being downloaded, the OP sets bits in data
word 64 of the interface area. You must then confirm the download
operation in the PLC program.
20
To download the data record, call screen DAT_1 if it is not still

available following editing of the data record. Press F14 to download the data record from the data medium on the OP to the PLC.
21
In the PLC program, set bit 13 in DW 64 of interface DB to 1 for

error-free downloading. Then reset bit 11 in DW64 to re-enable
the data mailbox. The program code for this might look as follows:
A DB 51
L DL 64
T MB 200
UN M 200.7
U M 200.6
S M 200.5
R M 200.3
L MB 200
T DL 64
BE
Result
8-16
The values for Juice are now in the addresses on the PLC. The identifications are in the data mailbox.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Functions
Purpose
ProTool features a whole number of functions which you can use in your configuration. Functions are used to
design the configuration for a specific process

for example, to jump from one screen to another.
control the process

for example, by setting a bit to turn on a motor.
take advantage of the characteristics of the TP or OP

for example, to display or print a message buffer.
perform system settings online on the TP or OP

for example, modifying interface parameters.
Using functions
For you to be able to use functions on the TP or OP, they must either be connected to defined entry points (see page 9-5) or be assigned to individual objects. Possible objects are screens, messages, function keys, buttons, fields and
variables. Depending on the object you select, only those functions are available in ProTool which are possible for the object and the TP or OP. Thus some
functions, such as the Set Bit function, can be assigned only to function keys or
buttons, for example. Figure 9-1 shows the Functions dialog box.
A list of all the functions available in ProTool will be found together with descriptions in Appendix A.
Figure 9-1
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Functions Dialog Box
9-1
Functions
Assigning several
functions
You can assign several functions to the same object simultaneously. The functions are then processed one after the other, as if they were in a batch file. You
set their order during configuration in the Functions dialog box. You can
change their order by means of the Up and Down buttons.
Configuration
principle
Figure 9-2 shows the basic structure of a function. An input parameter is transferred to the function. It may be constant or it may be read from a variable. The
variable in its turn may be only local or it may be linked to the PLC. In the
case of a link to the PLC, the value is specified by the process. The result of
the function is written to a variable, which in its turn may be local or linked to
the PLC.
Variable
Local
Function
Process
Process
Variable
Constant
Figure 9-2
Local
Configuration Principle for Functions
There are three different types of functions:
Functions without input parameters

These are functions which by definition trigger a specific action. They
include functions such as Unhide Date and Time or Deleting Event
Message Buffer.
Functions with input parameters

With these functions you have to specify the object or the setting at which
the function is to be executed. They include the functions Select Screen
and Event Window (ON/OFF)
Functions with input and output parameters

With these functions you have to specify the object or the setting at which
the function is to be executed. The result of this function is written to a
variable. These functions include Message Log (ON/OFF) and Mode.
You may also link functions to each other. In such a case, the output parameter
of the first function is the input function of the second. They include the functions Define Password and Define Password Level.
9-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Functions
Using functions
Functions can be attached to the following objects:

Variables
Function keys and buttons
Fields
Screens
Messages
Functions are not supplied for messages with standard ProTool. They are
available only by installing optional packages.
Using functions
several times
You can use the same function several times in your configuration. If the
warning Function ... used several times is used during compilation, a possible reason may be that the function uses different variables.
This is not permissible for the following functions:
Mode
Date Display/Edit
Message Log ON/OFF
Define Password
Define Password Level
Buffer Overflow
Language
Alarms Display First/Last
Time Display/Edit
Conditions
Apart from function parameters, you must also specify conditions for triggering the function for example, on pressing or releasing a function key or a
button. The conditions differ from function to function. The default setting for
Conditions has to be modified only in specific cases.
The conditions are listed below which are basically possible with the different
objects. Not all conditions are meaningful or possible for every function.
ProTool, therefore, makes available only those conditions which are applicable
to the different functions concerned.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
9-3
Functions
Object
Variable
Function key,
Button
Field
Screen
Condition
Explanation
Initialize
The function is triggered when the variable is initialized.
Enter Value
The function is executed after you enter a value in the

input field. Not until then is the value entered in the
variable of the input field.
Value Output
The function is executed before a changed value is entered in the variable by the PLC.
Read Data Record

Variable
The function is executed after the data record variable is

read by the data medium and before the contents are
saved.
Read Message Variable
The function is executed after the message variable is

read and before the contents of the message field are
output in a message.
Apply Value to Trend

Buffer
The function is executed when the value is applied to the

trend buffer.
Press key
The function is executed when the operator element is

pressed.
Repeat key
The function is executed repeatedly as long as the operator element remains pressed.
Release key
The function is executed when the operator element is

released.
Select Field
The function is executed when the field is selected.
Exit Field
The function is executed upon exiting from the field.
Select Screen
After formatting:
The function is executed upon selection of the screen
after the screen has been formatted.
Before formatting:
The function is executed upon selection of the screen
before the screen has been formatted.
Message
g
9-4
Exit Screen
The function is executed upon exiting from the screen.
Message Arrives
The function is executed when the message arrives.
Message Departs
The function is executed when the message departs.
Message Acknowledged
The function is executed when the alarm message is

acknowledged.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Functions
Global functions
You can configure functions globally by choosing System Functions from

the menu. The functions specified here are not assigned to individual objects
but are connected to specific entry points. The table below shows under which
conditions the functions can be executed depending on the entry point selected.
Entry point
Function is triggered, if ...
Recipe
a data record is read or written
Initialisations
a variable is initialized or a system start is

triggered
Print
a hard copy or message printing is initiated
Other
values are entered, there is a message buffer

overflow or the message buffer is deleted
If, for example, the function Set Bit is configured with the condition Enter
Value, the function is executed every time a value is entered in other words, a
bit is set irrespective of which field is selected.
Example
You wish to enable and disable automatic printing of messages on the OP35 by
pressing a key. Function key K7 will be used to disable, K8 will be used to
enable. The current status is to be displayed on the screen in plain language,
either as Log ON or as Log OFF.
Step
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Action
Choose System Screen/Keys from the menu and click key K7.
Choose Function Key K7 and click Functions.
Select on the list of Selectable Functions the function Message Log

ON/OFF. Apply the function by choosing the >> button to the list
of Selected Functions.
Click the Parameters button.
In the Function Parameters Message Log ON/OFF dialog box,

select the first parameter, ON/OFF (Key). Enter in the Constant
field the value 0 (for Printout OFF).
9-5
Functions
Step
Action
Select the second parameter, ON/OFF (Field). In the Variable field,

enter the name Log. The Log variable is a type BOOL variable
and is set to No PLC. The figure shows the settings which have
just been described.
The Log variable assumes the value 1 when Printout is enabled and
the value 0 when it is disabled.
Close the Function Parameters..., Functions and Function Key K7

dialog boxes by choosing OK.
Repeat steps 1 through 7 for function key K8. Enter under step 5 in
the Constant field the value 1 (for Printout ON).
Under 6, use the same variable, that is Log.
9-6
Exit from the Screen/Keys dialog box by choosing OK.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Functions
Step
Action
10
Open the screen on which you wish to view the current log status.
Configure a symbolic output by choosing Screen Fields Text
or Graphic List from the menu.
Set:
Usage:
Field Type:
Display:
Variable
Output
Text Symbol
Under Variable, select the name Log. The figure shows the Input/
Output dialog box with its settings.
11
Enter under List the name Status of the new text or graphic list
and click the Edit button.
12
Enter under Text or Graphic List the corresponding symbolic text

for both of the variable values that are possible, i.e. 0 and 1:
0
1
Report OFF
Log ON
Apply every entry separately to the text or graphic list by clicking

Add.
13
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Close the Text or Graphic List and Input/Output dialog boxes by

choosing OK twice in succession.
9-7
Functions
Date and time
The date and time are displayed on the TP or OP and modified by means of
functions. There is one function called Date Display/Edit and one called Time
Display/Edit. Attach these functions to variables that are not linked to the PLC.
At any one time in a configuration, you can use only one variable to which the
date or time is attached. If you use several variables for this, they are not updated when the date and time are set or modified.
In the following, you will find an example of how the date is displayed on the
TP or OP and can be modified. For this purpose, you create an input/output
field on a screen. Then attach the Date Display/Edit function to the variable of
the field.
Step
Action
Create a field. The Input/Output dialog box appears. Specify the

field length as 10.
Select Input/Output under Type.
Select String under Display.
Enter the name Date under Variable. Now, configure the variable
by clicking Edit. Set:
Type:
Length:
PLC name:
STRING
10
no PLC
Click Functions to assign a function to the variable.
Select in the left list box the Date Display/Edit function and move
it to the right box using the >> button. The function is then attached to the variable.
Exit from all open dialog boxes by choosing OK. The date is now
displayed in this field on the TP or OP, and you can also modify
the date.
If you now wish to display the date in another field, then use only the Date
variable in this case as well.
Day of Week
The current time and date can directly be set on the TP or OP by using the
standard screen. The day of week can only be set and read via PLC job 15.
Before reading for the first time the day of week must be set once per PLC job.
A list of all PLC jobs can be found in appendix B of this manual.
9-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Configuring in Different Languages
10
Display levels
With languages, we generally differentiate between two display levels. They

are:
the user interface language of ProTool and
the configuration language for the TP or OP.
User interface
language
The user interface language of ProTool is the language in which text is displayed on the menus and in the dialog boxes. You can set all the languages you
specified when you installed ProTool.
Configuration
language
The configuration language is the language in which you create your configuration. This is the language in which the pieces of text are displayed on the TP
or OP. You can create a configuration in the languages available under the
Windows version installed on your configuration computer. You can obtain
further languages by
Reloading in Windows:
Choose Control Panel Software Window Setup Language Support
in Windows, to add, for example, support for Greek, Cyrillic and Eastern
Europe.
Installing a version of Windows in a different language, for example, for

Chinese character sets.
You can load up to three different configuration languages simultaneously onto
the TP or OP by choosing System Language Assignment from the menu.
By default, the configuration language is the same as the user interface
language when ProTool is called. You change the configuration language by
choosing Edit Languages from the menu. If you want to set a different configuration language or if you have created your configuration in one language
and now wish to configure the next language, choose this menu item. The dialog box shown in Figure 10-1 appears.
Figure 10-1
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Dialog Box for Setting Languages
10-1
Editing language
and reference
language
Enter the following in the Languages dialog box:
The editing language

is the current configuration language in which configurable text is entered.
The reference language

should be regarded from the viewpoint of translation. When, for example,
you configure in the second language, you can display the text in the first
language as the reference language. This means that you can see the first
language as a reference for the translation.
Objects with
languagedependent text
The following objects contain language-dependent text:
event messages,
alarm messages,
screens,
recipes,
button labels
text lists and
information text.
Configuring in
several languages
If you create a multilingual configuration, you should first finish configuring

one language and then test it on the PLC. You can then type in the text strings
for the other languages.
Note
When you modify a configuration that has already been created in several
languages, do not subsequently move fields in event messages and alarm
messages.
Since there is no permanent association between a field and its position within
text, you should move the text, not the fields, if necessary.
Languagedependent fonts
On screens, you can also set fonts so that they are language-dependent by
choosing System Fonts. Depending on the editing language you selected,
you can configure up to three language-dependent fonts. A further font is
language-independent. It applies to all editing languages.
The first language-independent font is used, e.g., for messages. It must have a
character size of 816. Figure 10-2 shows the dialog box.
10-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Figure 10-2
Setting Language-Dependent Fonts
Note
If you change languages on the TP/OP, the corresponding language-dependent
fonts are also changed. This is important with languages whose character sets
are not contained in ANSI Code.
Languagedependent
keyboard
assignment
If you choose Edit Languages... and then select a language in the Editing
Language input field, the corresponding font is loaded and the keyboard assignment is modified. If the editing language you selected is different from the
current Windows language, the language-dependent keyboard (Figure 10-3) is
displayed with the new keyboard assignment on the screen.
You can now see where the differing characters are located on your keyboard
and can enter them. There is also the possibility of clicking the cursor directly
on the keys in the keyboard assignment to enter characters.
Figure 10-3
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Example of a Language-Dependent Keyboard with French as the

Editing Language
10-3
The language-dependent keyboard is automatically hidden when you change

the editing language back to the current Windows language. You can activate
and deactivate display of the language-dependent keyboard additionally by
choosing Window Keyboard from the menu.
Setting TP or OP
languages
Before the configuration is downloaded to the TP or OP, set the TP or OP

languages by choosing System Language Assignment from the menu.
Figure 10-4
Setting TP and OP Languages
The languages you can select on the TP or OP are listed at OP languages.

Choose not more than three languages in succession for your configuration.
These languages are also downloaded to the TP or OP during the download
operation.
Note
The language you enter first is set after the TP or OP has started up. In routine
operation, you can change the language on the TP or OP for example, by
using the System Settings standard screen.
With this button you select not more than three OP languages
in succession from the left list box.
With this button you can remove individual languages from
the list of OP Languages.
The languages may be changed in the configuration. If, for example, you wish
to load an identical configuration on several TPs or OPs with different languages, you can change the OP languages prior to the download operation.
10-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Adding languages
Using the New Language... button, you can add to the configuration languages
all the other languages that are available under Windows.
ProTool makes standard screens available for the following five configuration
languages:
English
French
German
Italian and
Spanish.
System messages
and keyboard
assignment
System messages for the TP or OP are available in the languages listed below.
There is a corresponding keyboard assignment for every one of these languages.
Chinese 1)
Czech 2)
Danish
Dutch
English
German
Finnish
French
Greek 2)
Hungarian 2)
Italian
Norwegian
Polish 2)
Portuguese
Russian 2)
Spanish
Swedish
Turkish 2)
1)
2)
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
To use Chinese in ProTool, you must must install Chinese Windows.

Chinese characters are entered using standard Windows tools.
To use these languages in ProTool, you have to reload them in Windows
first or install a version of Windows in a different language.
10-5
10-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
11
In this chapter
This chapter summarizes all the settings that are possible for a TP or OP. Some
settings have already been mentioned in other chapters when called for by the
context. All the settings are performed by choosing System from the menu.
Screen/Keys
Here you set the basic partitioning of the display and assign the function keys
on the OP. The assignment applies to the entire configuration. You can assign
Kx function keys only under this menu item. Fx function keys are similarly
assigned by choosing Screen/Keys from the menu. You perform local assignments on screens (refer to Section 4.6).
Functions
Here you configure global functions. The functions specified here are not
assigned to individual objects but are linked to specific entry points. You will
find information on global functions in Chapter 9 (page 9-5).
Settings
Here you perform general settings for the TP or OP such as the password for
the supervisor, the language-dependent time and date format and the record set
for recipes, in addition to the reserved data record memory for the flash and the
memory card.
Messages
Choose System Messages Settings from the menu to perform settings

common to all other editors. They include the printing of messages, display
type for alarm messages, warning on buffer overload, remaining buffer size,
language-dependent designation of messages in the buffer, and titles for pages
and buffers.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
11-1
Printer
Here you perform all the settings for the printer attached to the TP or OP. They
include the printer type and the interface parameters. When a printer is installed, a text or graphic list called Z_OP_PRINTER is created automatically. This
text or graphic list is used on the standard screen for printer settings, which is
supplied as part of the package.
You perform the settings for the TP or OP printer by choosing the following
two items from the menu system:
Settings
Here you set the printer type. You can specify several printers. For the TP or OP, the first printer on the text list is the
default printer. If another printer is attached instead of the
default printer, the printer type has to be changed online on
the TP or OP via the Z_PRINTER standard screen.
Note on graphic control characters:
Make sure that the details for 8-bit and 24-bit graphics under
Parameters Graphics are complete. If an escape sequence
is missing, a warning is issues during compilation. An error
message Printer not graphics compatible
appears on the TP or OP. Printing is not initiated.
Interface
Here you set the interface parameters, such as baud rate, level
(TTY or RS232) and the name of the interface to which the
printer is physically attached.
When ProTool is shipped, a few printers have already been defined on the text
list. But you can also add more printers to this text list. If necessary, you must
define a specific setup for these printers as detailed in the printer manual concerned. You will find up-to-date information on printers by clicking the Late
breaking information icon in the ProTool program group.
Memory
Requirements
This dialog box field shows you
the memory required by the configuration on the TP or OP

the amount of memory still available on the TP or OP following
completion of the download operation, and
when the configuration was last downloaded.

PLC
Here you set the PLC to which the TP or OP is connected. Set at the same time
the driver, including its driver parameters, that is used by the TP or OP and the
PLC to communicate with each other.
Language
Assignment
Here you set the languages which you require to be available on the TP or OP.
You can create a configuration in the languages available under the Windows
version installed on your configuration computer. Of these languages, you can
set not more than three as the TP or OP language (see also Chapter 10).
11-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Fonts
Here you set the fonts which you may use in your configuration. They are three
language-dependent fonts and one language-independent font. With the
language-dependent fonts, you can access special characters, for example, or
compensate different text lengths in individual languages by means of different
type sizes.
The language-independent font is used for symbols.
Area Pointers
Here you set the data areas required for communication between the TP or OP
and the PLC. The data areas have to be available on the PLC. The Area
Pointers menu item is used to tell the TP or OP what data areas it should
access. The data areas that you will have to set depend on the objects you
configured.
Table 11-1 shows who can read (R) from and who can write to (W) the
different data areas.
Table 11-1
Using Data Areas
Data Area
Required for
TP or OP
PLC
User version
Version check by TP or OP
Event messages
Configured event messages
Screen number
Evaluation of currently open screen by PLC
W/R
R/W
Evaluation by PLC of function key pressed
Trend request
Configured trends with Bit Trigger and Read

Whole Buffer
Trend transfer 1
Configured trends with Bit Trigger and Read

Whole Buffer
Trend transfer 2
Configured trends with Bit Trigger, Read Whole

Buffer and Switch Buffer
LED assignment 1)
Driving LEDs from PLC
Alarm
Acknowledgment of an alarm message by the PLC
acknowledgement PLC
Alarm
acknowledgment OP
Message from the TP or OP to the PLC that an

alarm message was acknowledged
Interface area
Communication between TP or OP and PLC

(vital with SIMATIC S5)
W/R
R/W
Alarm messages
Configured alarm messages
System keyboard 1)
Evaluation by PLC of system key pressed
Data mailbox
Function keyboard
Recipes; indirect transfer of variables

1)
1) Operator panels only
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
11-3
11-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Compiling and Downloading a

Configuration to the System
Compiling
12
You have to compile your configuration before it can be downloaded to the TP

or OP. Compilation creates a file from the configuration that can run on the TP
or OP. A consistency check is performed on your configuration at the same
time. If any data are missing or are incorrect, corresponding error messages are
written to a status window.
If you have configured event messages, for example, but an event message area
has not been created under Area Pointers, an error message is issued.
Note
You can refer to context-sensitive online Help on error messages issued during
compilation. To do so, position the cursor on the error message and press F1.
This makes troubleshooting and remedial action easier for you.
Firmware
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
The TP or OP hardware includes the device proper and its flash and RAM
memories. The firmware corresponds to the operating system installed on the
TP or OP. It is supplied together with the ProTool configuration software and
downloaded together with the compiled file to the TP or OP during the download operation.
12-1
Compiling and Downloading a Configuration to the System
12.1
Downloading a Configuration to the TP or OP
Download
methods
You can download a configuration for a specific device in two ways

serially, over a direct link from the PU or PC to the TP or OP
by means of an MPI network configuration
In this particular instance, the PC or PU and the TP or OP are located in the
MPI network configuration. Set the download parameters by choosing
File Settings Download.
If there is no configuration yet on the TP or OP, only serial downloading is
possible. Downloading via the MPI can take place only when a configuration is
already residing on the TP or OP.
Baud rate
Bear the following points in mind when setting the baud rate:
With a cable set for TTY level (PU cable), you may only set a maximum
baud rate of 9600 Bd. Higher baud rates can be used only with a cable set
for RS232 level.
For low-performance configuration computers, you have to decrease the
default baud rate of 56000 bauds in steps until reliable downloading is
possible.
Serial download
To download your configuration from the configuration computer to the TP or

OP, proceed as follows:
Step
1
2
Action
Using the interconnecting cable, connect the TP or OP to the PC
or PU (refer to the equipment manual for the TP or OP).
Place the TP or OP in Download mode:
in routine TP or OP operation
for example, by means of the System Settings standard screen
when the OP starts up

using the key combination ESC + Cursor
by means of overall reset of the OP using
ESC + Cursor + Cursor
when the TP starts up
using the SERIAL DOWNLOAD button on the boot menu
of the TP
by means of overall reset of the TP (touch top left corner of
screen when TP starts up)
You will find more information on Download mode in the
Equipment Manual for the TP or OP.
12-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Step
Downloading via
MPI
Action
Set the serial interface of your PU or PC by choosing

File Settings Download from the menu.
Start downloading of the configuration by choosing

File Download from the menu.
Following the download operation, the TP or OP starts up and

displays the start screen.
A configuration can be downloaded from the PU or PC to the TP or OP via the

MPI only when an S7 configuration already resides on the TP or OP. To do so,
perform the following steps:
Step
Action
Embed the PU or PC in the MPI network configuration. For this,

an MPI board is required on the PU or PC. Further, STEP 7
software must be installed.
Embed the TP or OP in the MPI network configuration. For this
purpose, take into account the following notes on the MPI address.
2
3
Using the System Settings standard screen, for example, place the
TP or OP in MPI Download mode.
You will find more information on Download mode in the
Equipment Manual for the TP or OP.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Set the MPI interface of your PU or PC by choosing

File Settings Download from the menu.
Enter the MPI address of the TP or OP by choosing Edit from the

menu.
Start downloading of the configuration by choosing

File Download from the menu.
Following the download operation, the TP or OP starts up and

displays the start screen.
12-3
Setting the MPI

address
Figure 12-1 shows an MPI configuration featuring an OP37. If you embed an

OP37 in the MPI configuration that has still not loaded a configuration, the
default MPI address is 1.
S7300
CPU
2
MPI
1
OP37
Figure 12-1
3
OP37
0
PU or PC
MPI Configuration Featuring an OP37
If you now load a configuration on the OP37 over the MPI, you must specify 1
as the MPI address. In your configuration, however, you specified 3 as the
MPI address for the OP37. Now that the configuration has been downloaded,
the OP37 has 3 as its MPI address.
Several TPs or OPs

in MPI
configuration
12-4
If you wish to embed several TPs or OPs in the MPI configuration, you can
only do it successively. First physically connect a device. Then download the
configuration. Only then can you physically connect the next OP. If you were
to physically connect both OPs first and then download the configuration,
address conflicts would result. The reason for this is that both OPs have the
same address. This is not allowed in the MPI configuration.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
12.2
Managing Configuration Data on the TP or OP
Flash
The flash memory on the TP or OP is the equivalent of the hard disk of a PC.
Data are not deleted from the flash memory when the power is turned off. This
is the reason why data have first to be loaded into the flash memory. When the
TP or OP starts up, it automatically loads the data from the flash memory into
RAM. Data are stored in compressed form in the flash.
RAM
The RAM is the equivalent of the main memory of a PC. Data in RAM are
deleted when the power is turned off. Figure 12-2 shows the data on the different storage devices. Stored data in RAM are not compressed and therefore
require more storage space than in the flash. This is true of both configuration
data and firmware.
Memory card
A memory card is an external device, comparable with a floppy disk. It takes

priority over a flash memory. You can use the memory card
to back up data stored in the internal flash memory on the TP or OP

to restore backups
to load or store recipe data records
to load configuration data onto another destination TP or OP without using
a PC or PU
as a storage medium, as an alternative or in addition to the internal flash
memory.
Advantages of
memory card
Compared with the internal flash memory, a memory card features the
following advantages:
A memory card is a portable storage medium. This means that you can port
recipe data, for example, from a TP or OP to another TP or OP.
You can run configurations directly from the memory card, since the TP or
OP detects when a card is inserted. In this instance, the TP or OP initially
accesses the memory card and then the internal flash memory, in that order.
With up to 16 MB, there is sufficient space for large configurations or a

large number of recipe data records.
The data mentioned above are
firmware
configuration and/or
data records.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
12-5
Memory card
Internal flash
Data records
Data records
Configuration
Configuration
Firmware
Firmware
Internal RAM
Configuration
Firmware
Figure 12-2
Managing Configuration Data on the TP or OP
Memory
requirement
for data records
By choosing System Settings from the menu, you can set the reserved data
record memory for the flash memory and the memory card. You can reserve a
total of 448 KB for the flash memory and 384 KB for the memory card.
Creating data
records
Data records can be created only on a TP or OP. The flash memory or the memory card can be used as a storage medium. Once the area for the data records
has been created, it is not automatically deleted when a new configuration is
transferred. If a configuration is so large that it does not fit into the storage
space available, polling takes place with a view to overwriting the reserved
data record area.
Initial download
If you are loading a configuration onto the TP or OP for the very first time,
you can select only the flash memory or the memory card as the storage
medium.
Only the memory card, not the flash memory, can be selected if the memory
card has been inserted. The firmware is always downloaded automatically, too.
Download update
If a configuration resides on the TP or OP already, you can choose between the

flash memory/memory card and RAM if you wish to perform another download. When downloading to the flash memory/memory card, the firmware is
downloaded again only if the version on the PU or PC is different from that on
the TP or OP.
You should download to RAM only during commissioning. Since RAM is not
backed up in a power failure, the data are lost. The advantage of downloading
to RAM is download updating. With download updating, only modifications
are downloaded to the TP or OP. This means that the download time is shorter.
Once the configuration has been downloaded, it should be transferred to the
flash memory.
12-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
12.3
Troubleshooting Download Problems
Problem, cause,
remedy
Problems may arise when you download the configuration to the TP or OP. In
the majority of cases either the baud rate is too high or other drivers are being
used simultaneously on the configuration computer for example, in the case
of connection to a network. The following table shows possible problems, their
cause and remedy.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Downloading
g is aborted
after the message Line
Error is issued several
times.
The cable set is too long.
Select lower baud rate.
The cable set is poorly screened or

interference signals are induced into
the cable from other equipment.
PC performance insufficient.
Another driver is running in the

background for example, with
networking.
PC performance insufficient.
Downloading is aborted
and ProTool crashes.
Downloading does not take The standard communication driver

has not been entered in the Windows
place.
device manager.
Interrupt problems. Various boards

use the same interrupt.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Check the Properties window of the device

manager for the device status of the COM
port.
If necessary, modify the configuration of your
computer, set the standard communication
driver or install ProTool on a stand-alone
computer.
Modify the configuration of your PU or PC,
or install ProTool on a stand-alone PC.
12-7
12-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
13
Chapters
You can print all or part of the current configuration. Part means that you
can print either one or more chapters or individual pages of a chapter.
Chapter refers to the type of object. All the objects of any one type, such as
screens, variables, etc., are printed in a separate chapter.
Standard reports
When ProTool is supplied to you, it features the following standard reports:

complete
area pointers
event messages
alarm messages
screens
variables
text or graphic lists
Initiating printing
You initiate printing by choosing File Print fom the menu. Figure 13-1
shows the dialog box. The printer settings and the printer options automatically correspond to the Windows standard functions you set for your
computer.
With the editors for event messages, alarm messages and screens, there are
also editor-specific menu items on the menu bar. If you choose Print at this
point, the corresponding standard report is set automatically.
Figure 13-1
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Print Dialog Box
13-1
Printing separate
pages
You can also print separate pages of a chapter. To print separate pages, select
at Contents the corresponding chapter and the Pages check box and specify
the pages you want to have printed.
Preview
Press the Preview button for a preview of the report on the screen. Here you
can see the prospective size of the report or the page on which a particular
object will appear. Similarly, you can check the settings.
Settings
You can create individual designs for configuration printouts. In this instance,
make sure that the settings for the reports do not apply to other projects as
well. The following settings are possible for reports:
page margins,
text for headers and footers,
parameters for separate chapters,
design cover,
create self-defined reports.
Creating and
modifying reports
Choosing the Reports button takes you to another dialog box. Here you can
perform settings for the reports. You cannot rename standard reports or add
or delete any chapters to and from them. You have to create self-defined
reports under a new name.
You can create the cover once only. You can create a graphic or text by using
an application. Similarly, you can embed an existing file.
13-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Page
Here you can define the page margins along with the
headers and footers.
Parameters
The parameters are specific to each object type. An object

consists of different components in the configuration. Some
settings are optional, others are mandatory. In your printout,
you can specify whether you would like all or just selected
components of the objects to be printed.
The figure shows the dialog box for the parameters of the
Variables chapter.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
13-3
13-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
14
Overview
This chapter describes ProTools file structure and Project Managers

functions.
STEP 7 integration
If you have installed ProTool with STEP 7 integrated, use the SIMATIC
Manager instead of the Project Manager. This means that you can copy,
move, back up and restore projects just like you can with STEP 7. The
Project Manager is no longer available.
File structure
Figure 14-1 shows the file structure created for the default installation of
ProTool.
C
PROTOOL
System files
Firmware
Drivers
Functions
Fonts
OPTIONS
Upgrades
SAMPLES
Example configurations
STANDARD
Standard screens
SYSMSG
System messages
UTILITY
Examples for the user
TYPDAT
Software for PROFIBUS-DP
LANGUAGE
Installed languages
Project
NAME.PDB
Figure 14-1
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Configuration file
ProTools File Structure
14-1
14.1
Scope of supply
PROTOOL directory
The C:\PROTOOL directory contains all the files belonging to the ProTool
program. In addition, all the entries required for initializing ProTool are made
in the Windows directory. ProTool is installed under a separate program
group.
New configurations are also stored in the C:\PROTOOL directory after they
have been created. Every configuration consists of one file (name: *.PDB).
This file identifies the configuration. Different configurations have to be
stored under different names. By default, the names PRO0 through
PRO65535 are assigned.
When a configuration is compiled, a file is created. The file is stored as
NAME.FUD in the C:\PROTOOL directory, too.
PROTOOL\SAMPLES
directory
The C:\PROTOOL\SAMPLES directory contains the example configurations

supplied for ProTool. In addition, the directory contains the PLC programs
for the example configurations. Example configurations and PLC programs
have been geared to each other.
PROTOOL\STANDARD
directory
The C:\PROTOOL\STANDARD directory contains the standard configurations supplied for every TP and OP. Standard configurations contain screens
on which general-purpose functions have already been configured. These
functions include, for example, mode change for download, editing messages
and printer settings.
A separate standard configuration is available for every type of device. The
table below shows the standard configurations for devices featuring graphics
displays.
TP or OP
OP25
OP27
OP35
14-2
Standard Configuration
Default PLC
OP25.pdb
SIMATIC 500/505
OP25_S5.pdb
SIMATIC S5
OP25_S7_200.pdb
SIMATIC S7-200
OP25_S7_300_400.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
OP27.pdb
SIMATIC 500/505
OP27_S5.pdb
SIMATIC S5
OP27_S7_200.pdb
SIMATIC S7-200
OP27_S7_300_400.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
OP35.pdb
SIMATIC 500/505
OP35_S5.pdb
SIMATIC S5
OP35_S7_200.pdb
SIMATIC S7-200
OP35_S7_300_400.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
TP or OP
OP37
TP27
TP37
C7-626
Recommendation
Standard Configuration
Default PLC
OP37.pdb
SIMATIC 500/505
OP37_S5.pdb
SIMATIC S5
OP37_S7_200.pdb
SIMATIC S7-200
OP37_S7_300_400.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
TP27.pdb
SIMATIC 500/505
TP27_S5.pdb
SIMATIC S5
TP27_S7_200.pdb
SIMATIC S7-200
TP27_S7_300_400.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
TP37.pdb
SIMATIC 500/505
TP37_S5.pdb
SIMATIC S5
TP37_S7_200.pdb
SIMATIC S7-200
TP37_S7_300_400.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
C7_626.pdb
SIMATIC S7-300/400
Always base a new configuration on the standard configuration. Make a copy

of the standard configuration and then work with the copy. You copy a configuration by saving it under a different name in ProTool. The symbolic names
of variables in standard configurations begin with Z_ to distinguish them
from other variables.
Standard configurations already contain configured standard screens. The
table shows the applications implemented with the different standard screens.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
14-3
Screen Name
Use
Z_BACKUP
Backup
Z_FORCE1)
Z_MESSAGES
Restore
Force Variable
Message handling such as
Z_PASSWORD
Call Event Message Window

Call Event Buffer/Event Message Page
Delete Events Delete Buffer
Call Alarm Buffer/Alarm Message Screen
Delete Alarm Buffer
Assign and modify password
Z_PRINTER
Log on
Set printer and printer parameters
You can jump from this screen on the OP27 and
TP27 to the following standard screens:
Z_RECORD 1
Z_RECORD 2
Z_SETTINGS
Z_HARDCOPY
Z_COLOR
Set parameters for Print Screen (ASCII/graphics)
Deactivate individual colors or modify color assignments for printing
Basic functions for using data records
Extended functions for using data records
General system settings, such as
Z_STATUS1)
Z_SYSTEM_MEN
Change Modes
Language Switch
Blank Screen
Enter Date and Time
Display First/Last Alarm Message
Message Log ON/OFF
Overflow Warning ON/OFF
Acoustic signal (for TPs)
Contrast (for TPs)
Calibration (for TPs)
Status variable for diagnosing the PLC
Summary screen for standard screens.
Z_HARDCOPY2)
Z_COLOR2)
From this screen, you can go to the following

standard screens:
Z_PASSWORD
Z_PRINTER
Z_STATUS1)
Z_SETTINGS
Z_MESSAGES
1) OPs only
2) OP27 and TP27 only
14-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
PROTOOL\SYSMSG
directory
The C:\PROTOOL\SYSMSG directory contains system messages displayed

on the TP or OP.
PROTOOL\TYPDAT
directory
The C:\PROTOOL\TYPDAT directory contains files which ProTool requires

for configurations in master-slave operation with PROFIBUS-DP.
PROTOOL\UTILITY
directory
In the C:\PROTOOL\UTILITY directory, a whole number of examples and

MS-DOS tools are available to you in the graphics library for your configuration.
Graphics library
The graphics library contains symbols for different subject areas for
example, symbols for pumps, valves and logic elements. The symbols are
available in the following file formats:
CDR
(Corel Draw)
DRW
(Micrografix Designer)
BMP
(Bitmap)
Corel Draw and Designer files contain all the symbols of a specific subject.
The bitmap files contain only one symbol. The filenames for the bitmaps are
numbered consecutively for every subject. The bitmap files are stored in separate directories for every subject. The name of the directory is the subject.
Note
The graphics library supplied with ProTool is available only in compressed
form after it has been installed. To decompress the library, run the *.exe
files.
PROTOOL\OPTIONS
directory
The C:\PROTOOL\OPTIONS contains software for upgrades.
PROTOOL\LANGUAGE
directory
The C:\PROTOOL\LANGUAGE directory contains language-dependent

system files for installed ProTool languages.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
14-5
14.2
Project Manager
Purpose
Project Manager contains functions for user-friendly handling of the configurations you create with ProTool:
Backup
Restore
Project overview.
Project Manager is available only when you install ProTool as a stand-alone
program.
Calling
You call Project Manager by choosing File Project Manager from the
menu. When you call Project Manager for the first time, the dialog box
illustrated in Figure 14-2 appears.
Figure 14-2
File formats
Find Dialog Box for Specifying Search Criteria
The Find dialog box is where you specify your search criteria. In this case,
you can choose from the following file formats under Format:
configurations (*.pdb),
backups (*.ar?) and
configurations/backups (*.pdb;*.ar?).
14-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Selecting a file
At Section, set the drives and directories applicable to you. Clicking OK

takes you to the dialog box shown in Figure 14-3. You select the file in this
dialog box. This dialog box also appears if you call Project Manager again.
Clicking the Find button takes you back to the dialog box shown in Figure
14-2.
Figure 14-3
Backup and
Restore
Project Manager Dialog Box
For backing and restoring project files, Project Manager provides Backup and
Restore functions. Project Manager supports data backup and restore over
several floppy disks. This is necessary, in particular, with large configurations
for which one floppy disk is insufficient.
The Backup and Restore dialog boxes are identical in structure. Figure 14-4
shows the Backup dialog box.
Figure 14-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Backup Dialog Box
14-7
Starting Backup
When you wish to archive a configuration (backup), you first select the configuration file in the Project Manager dialog box. In the Backup dialog box,
enter the destination drive and the file name of the file you want to back up.
Press OK to start backup.
ProTool automatically prompts you to insert a new floppy disk, if necessary.
The backup procedure is then interrupted until you insert a new floppy disk
and confirm it in the displayed dialog box.
Note the floppy disk number on the floppy disk with backups extending over
more than one floppy disk. This is the only successful way of reading in the
backup disks in the correct order.
Starting Restore
14-8
You restore backups in a similar manner.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Creating Communication Areas for

Non-SIMATIC PLCs
In this chapter
15
This chapter describes data areas used by the TP or OP and the PLC to communicate with each other. These data areas are required only when you wish to
use the corresponding TP or OP functions. The configured data areas have to
be installed on the PLC.
Note
The interface area described below applies to all PLCs except SIMATIC
PLCs.
The interface area for SIMATIC PLCs is described in the Communication
Users Guide.
Purpose
The interface area is required when you use the following functions:
send PLC jobs to the TP or OP

synchronize date and time between the PLC and the TP or OP
check version number
edit recipes (transfer of data records)
detect TP or OP startup in the PLC program
evaluate the TP or OP mode in the PLC program
evaluate the TP or OP life bit in the PLC program
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15-1
Creating Communication Areas for Non-SIMATIC PLCs
Creating the
interface area
You set the interface area in ProTool by choosing

from the menu. In addition, the area has to be available on the PLC.
Figure 15-1 shows the structure of the interface area.
Data word
n+0
n+1
n+2
n+5
n+6
n+7
n+8
n+9
Control bits
Reserved
Job mailbox
Acknowledgement bits
Reserved
Version number
Time
n+11
n+12
Date
n+14
n+15
Reserved
n+25
Figure 15-1
Counting direction
of bits
Structure of the Interface Area in Data Words
The counting direction of the bits in a data word depends on the PLC. In the
description that follows, data words are illustrated on two screens in every
case. In explanation of the bits, the bit number is represented in the counting
direction
clockwise (right left), starting at 0

without brackets
counter-clockwise (left right), starting at 1

with brackets
15-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15.1
Control and Acknowledgement Bits
Introduction
A word is available for every control and acknowledgement bit. Word n+0
contains the control bits. They are written by the PLC and read by the TP or
OP. Word n+6 contains the acknowledgement bits. They are written by the TP
or OP and read by the PLC.
Structure
The following illustrations show the detailed structure of the control and acknowledgement bits. This is followed by a description of achieving synchronization of the TP or OP with the PLC by setting bits.
Control bits word n+0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9
7 6 5
3 2
Erroneous transfer
Error-free transfer
Acknowledgement bits word n+6

15 14 13 12 11 10 9
7 6 5
3 2
Data transfer
complete
Data mailbox
disabled
Life bit
TP or OP mode
TP or OP startup
Figure 15-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Control and Acknowledgement Bits for Clockwise Direction
15-3
Control bits word n+0

1
4 5 6
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Erroneous transfer
Error-free transfer
Acknowledgement bits word n+6

1
4 5 6
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Data transfer
complete
Data mailbox
disabled
Life bit
TP or OP mode
TP or OP startup
Figure 15-3
TP or OP startup
Control and Acknowledgement Bits for Counter-Clockwise Direction
Bit 0(16)* in acknowledgment bits

1 = TP or OP has started
0 = TP or OP is starting
The bit is set by the TP or OP when startup has finished.
TP or OP mode
Bit 1(15) in acknowledgement bits

1 = TP or OP is offline
0 = TP or OP is in normal mode
The bit is set if the TP or OP has been switched to Offline mode by the operator. In Online mode, the bit is set to 0.
Life bit
Bit 2(14) in acknowledgement bits

The purpose of the life bit is to ensure that any disruption of the connection
from the TP or OP to the PLC is detected immediately. The TP or OP inverts
the life bit in the interface area at regular intervals.
* The number in brackets applies to the counter-clockwise counting direction
15-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Synchronizing
data record
transfer
Control bits:
Bit 10(6)*
1 = Data record/variable is erroneous
0 = Evaluation not performed
Bit 9(7)
1 = Data record/variable is error-free
Acknowledgement bits:
Bit 9(7)
1 = Data transfer complete
Bit 8(8)
1 = Data mailbox disabled
0 = Data mailbox is vacant
The control and acknowledgement bits in the interface area synchronize the
transfer of data records. By default, a transfer is initiated by means of an operator input on the TP or OP.
Transferring from
TP or OPPLC
The following description deals with the process of setting sync bits by the TP
or OP and the reaction to them by the PLC program.
Step
Action
The TP or OP checks bit 8(8) of the acknowledgement bits. If the

bit is set to 1 (= data mailbox disabled), the transfer is ended with
a system error message. If the bit is set to 0, the TP or OP sets the
bit to 1.
The TP or OP enters the identifications in the data mailbox.

With a data record that is required to be transferred indirectly,
the values of the variables are also written to the data mailbox.
With a data record that is required to be transferred directly, the
values of the variable are written to the configured address.
The TP or OP sets bit 9(7) of the acknowledgement bits to 1

(=data transfer complete).
Acknowledge in the PLC program whether the transfer was

error-free or erroneous.
Error-free:
Control bit 9(7) is set to 1
Erroneous:
Control bit 10(6) is set to 1
The TP or OP resets bits 9(7) and 8(8) of the acknowledgement

bits.
Reset control bits 10(6) and 9(7) in the PLC program.
* The number in brackets refers to the counter-clockwise counting direction
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15-5
15.2
Data Areas in the Interface Area
In this chapter
This chapter describes the structure and usage of user data areas located in the
interface area.
The PLC initiates an action on the TP or OP via the job mailbox. All the other
bytes are areas to which the TP or OP writes data. These areas can be evaluated
by the PLC program. The bytes are described in detail below.
Job mailbox
Words n+2 through n+5:

PLC jobs can be transferred to the TP or OP via the job mailbox, thus initiating
actions on the TP or OP.
The job mailbox consists of four words. The first word of the job mailbox contains the job number. The job parameters (three at most) have to be entered in
the other words.
Job mailbox:
Data word
n+2
Job No.
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
n+5
Parameter 3
If the first word of the job mailbox is not equal to zero, the TP or OP evaluates
the PLC job. The TP or OP resets this data word thereafter to zero. For this
reason it is necessary to enter the parameters in the job mailbox before entering
the job number.
The PLC jobs that are possible are listed with their job numbers and parameters in Appendix B.
Version number
15-6
Word n+8
The TP or OP enters the version number of the driver in word n+8. The version
number can be evaluated in the PLC program.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Date and time
Time
Date
= Words n+9 through n+11

= Words n+12 through n+14
PLC job 41 can initiate the transfer of time and date from the TP or OP to the
PLC.
Figure 15-4 shows the structure of the data area. All specifications are BCDcoded.
n+10
n+11
Figure 15-4
Not assigned
Hour (0 to 23)
Minute (0 to 59)
Second (0 to 59)
Not assigned
n+12
Not assigned
Day (1 to 7)
n+13
Day (1 to 31)
Month (1 to 12)
n+14
Year (0 to 99)
Not assigned
Time
Data word
n+9
Right byte
Date
Left byte
Structure of the Time and Date data areas
To detect when the date and time were transferred, you should set the data
words to 0 before initiating the PLC job.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15-7
15.3
OP Keyboard and LED Assignments
Usage
Key operations on the OP can be transferred to the PLC and then evaluated. In
this way it is possible to draw the operators attention to the incorrect operation
of a key by means of, say, a message.
The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the function keys of the OP can be driven
by the PLC. This means that it is possible, for example, to indicate to the operator by means of a lit LED on a key, depending on the situation, that he should
press a specific key.
Condition
To be able to use this option, you have to create suitable data areas called
assignments on the PLC and to specify them as area pointers in your configuration.
Note on TPs
The touch panel does not have a keyboard or LEDs to which keys are assigned.
This is the reason why you do not need to create area pointers for the TP in
respect of the keyboard and LED assignments.
Transfer
Keyboard assignments are transferred spontaneously to the PLC, meaning that

a transfer is performed whenever a modification has been registered on the OP.
There is therefore no need to configure a polling time.
Not more than two simultaneously pressed keys are transferred for OPs featuring graphics displays.
Assigning values
All keys (apart from SHIFT)

While the corresponding key is pressed, its assigned bit in the keyboard assignment has 1 as its value; at all other times its value is 0.
Note
If the OP is switched off while the key is pressed or if it is separated from the
PLC, the corresponding bit will remain set in the keyboard assignment.
15-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15.3.1 System Keyboard Assignment
Structure
The system keyboard assignment is a data area having a fixed length of three
data words. To be able to use the system keyboard assignment, you have to
create a system keyboard type data area under Area Pointers in your configuration.
Precisely one bit is permanently assigned in the system keyboard assignment to
every key belonging to the system keyboard.
Keyboard assignment for OP25 and OP27:
W X S T AZ
+/- .
Y Z
DEL/

INS
E F C DA B K L I J G H Q R O P M N U V
0
7
9
8
6
4
3
2
1
5
Reserved
1st word
2nd word
3rd word
Keyboard communication bit

for the clockwise counting
direction

for the counterclockwise
counting direction
Keyboard assignment for OP35 and OP37:

(
+/
):
AZ
INS
DEL
AZ
ENTER
ESC
ACK
HELP
Y Z Q R I J A B TAB G H E F C D O P M N K L W X U V S T = ,
9
8
6
4
3
2
1
5
7
+
/
0
*
Reserved
for the clockwise counting
direction
1st word
2nd word
3rd word

for the counterclockwise
counting direction
Note
Unused bits must not be overwritten by the user program.
Keyboard
communication bit
The keyboard area pointer status bit is used as a check bit. It is set to 1 every
time the keyboard assignment is transferred from the OP to the PLC and
should be reset following evaluation of the data area by the user program.
By regular reading of the area pointer status bit, it is possible to determine in
the user program whether the keyboard assignment has been re-transferred.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15-9
15.3.2 Function Keyboard Assignment
Data areas
The function keyboard assignment can be divided into a maximum of eight

separate data areas. The overall length of these data areas must not exceed
eight data words. To be able to use the function keyboard assignment, you have
to create a function keyboard type data area under Area Pointers in your configuration.
Key assignment
The assignment of the different keys to the bits of the data areas is set when the
function keys are configured. In this context, the number within the assignment
area is specified for every key.
Keyboard
communication bit
The highest order bit in the last data word of every data area is the keyboard
communication bit. It is used as a check bit. The keyboard communication bit
is set to 1 every time the keyboard assignment is transferred from the OP to the
PLC. After the data area has been evaluated by the user program, the keyboard
area pointer status bit should be reset.
By regular reading of the area pointer status bit, it is possible to determine in
the user program whether a block has been re-transferred.
15-10
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
15.3.3 LED Assignment
Data areas
The LED assignment can be divided into a maximum of eight separate data areas.
The overall length of these data areas must not exceed sixteen data words. To use
the LED assignment, you have to create an LED assignment type data area in
your configuration under Area Pointers.
Polling time
If a polling time of 0 is specified for a data area, it is not transferred cyclically

to the OP. PLC job No. 42 must then be used to drive the LEDs (refer to
Appendix B).
LED assignment
You set the assignment of the different LEDs to the bits of the data areas when
you configure the function keys. In this context, you specify the number of the
assignment area and the bit number within this area for every LED.
Bit number n denotes the first of two successive bits, which drive a total of
four different LED states (refer to Tables 15-1 and 15-2).
Table 15-1
LED Functions for Clockwise Counting Direction
Bit n + 1
Bit n
Off
Flashing at approx. 2 Hz
Flashing at approx. 0.5 Hz
Permanently on
Table 15-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
LED Function
LED Functions for Counter-Clockwise Counting Direction
Bit n + 1
Bit n
LED Function
Off
Flashing at approx. 0.5 Hz
Flashing at approx. 2 Hz
Permanently on
15-11
15-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Polling time and

update time
16
The polling times specified in the configuration software for Area pointers and
the polling times for variables (Section 5.1) are important aspects in respect of
the update times actually achieved. The update time is calculated as follows:
Update time = polling time + transfer time + processing time.
Observe the following points when you are configuring to achieve optimum
update times:
Make the different data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary.
Define contiguous data areas as belonging together. The actual update time
improves if you create one large area as opposed to several small ones.
Polling times that have been dimensioned too short unnecessarily degrade
overall performance. Set the polling time commensurate with the rate of
variation of process values. The temperature variation of a furnace, for example, is distinctly more inert than the variation in speed of an electric
drive.
Target value for the polling time: approx. 1 sec.
Do without cyclic transfer of the user data areas, if necessary, to improve

update times (polling time 0). In its place, use PLC jobs to transfer the user
data areas spontaneously.
Place the variables of a message or a screen without gaps in a data area.

So that modifications on the PLC can be properly detected by the TP or OP,
they must be present at least during the actual polling time.
Optimizing loading
and saving
It may take a relatively long time to load and save configurations, especially
when they contain a large number of graphics created in Designer, Corel Photo
Paint and Corel Draw. The following recommendations will result in considerable reductions in time:
1. Save As
Save every now and again by choosing Save As .... This optimizes data storage and reduces the size of the *.pdb file.
2. Close applications
Close all other programs. This releases more working memory for ProTool.
3. Configurations on local drive
use your local drive to start configurations, not your network. Network
access is often too slow.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
16-1
4. Use fewer colors

The memory requirement for graphics rises proportionately with the
number of colors used. ProTool reduces the colors available in imported
graphics to eight ProTool colors. If you use more than eight colors in your
graphics, you expend your system resources unnecessarily.
5. Available disk storage
Your drive should have disk storage available large enough for storing your
configuration, as a minimum requirement. This also applies to when you
start your configuration on a network.
6. More working memory
The memory requirement rises proportionately with the number and size of
the graphics objects you are using. More main memory appreciably reduces
processing times.
7. Graphic editor
Avoid using a large number of graphics from Designer, Corel Photo Paint
and Corel Draw. Program components of these editors are used to edit
graphics. These editors are in part very slow. The best times are obtained
with Paint.
8. Monitor system resources
When working with ProTool, make sure you have 20 to 40 MB main
memory and at least 65% free system resources. You will find information
on this in Explorer by choosing Help About. Make your main memory
larger, if necessary by adding RAM or virtual memory. Additional system
resources are freed by closing other applications.
Furthermore, you should delete any fonts you do not require (Settings
Control Panel Fonts). If you do not achieve any appreciable improvement in terms of free resources, re-launch Windows. System resources
which are permanently blocked by some programs as a result of errors are
freed as a result of rebooting.
9. TEMP environment variable
A temporary file is created by Windows for files which are opened and processed. Use the TEMP environment variable to decide where you want to
store this temporary file.
You normally specify the path for the TEMP environment variable in your
autoexec.bat system file. If you do not place the TEMP environment
variable in your autoexec.bat system file, the temporary file is stored
in your local Windows directory. If ProTool issues an error message
drawing your attention to a write access error, the storage space on the
drive may be too small for the temporary file.
16-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Description of Functions
General remarks
The list below presents an overview of the functions featured by ProTool.

Functions in complex contexts are not explained here for example, functions
for transferring and editing data records, for editing passwords and Status/
Force Variable.
However, these functions are fully configured on the standard screens. For you
to be able to use these functions, you have to embed the corresponding start
screen in your configuration. The equipment manuals explain how you handle
standard screens.
In ProTool, a dialog box makes only those functions available that are possible
in that particular dialog box. Functions that can be configured only in connection with a function key or button are not made available in the case of variables.
Under the following conditions, a function can also be triggered by the PLC:
The variable configured for a function is linked to the PLC.

In the Functions dialog box, the selection you made under Conditions was
the item Value Output.
Symbols
The symbols following the different functions have the following meanings:
The function can be triggered by pressing a function key or button.
The function is triggered by means of the variable in an input/

output field.
The function has been implemented on a standard screen. In

addition, the name of the standard screen is quoted in which the
function is used, for example.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-1
Overview
ProTool features the following functions:

General functions:
Backup/Restore Module (not TP27; refer to page A-4)
Mode (refer to page A-6)
Select Screen (refer to page A-8)
Dynamic Screen Selection 1 (refer to page A-9)
Dynamic Select Screen 2 (refer to page A-10)
Select Previous Screen (refer to page A-11)
Blank Screen (refer to page A-12)
Scroll UP (refer to page A-13)
Scroll DOWN (refer to page A-14)
Language (refer to page A-15)
TP functions:
Display Information Text (TPs only; refer to page A-17)
Adjust Contrast (TP27 only; refer to page A-18)
Acoustic Signal (TPs only; refer to page A-19)
Touch Calibration (TP37 only; refer to page A-20)
Editing Bits
Set Bit in Word (refer to page A-21)
Reset Bit in Word (refer to page A-22)
Set/Reset Bit in Word (refer to page A-23)
Set Bit When Key is Pressed (refer to page A-24)
Direct Key (TPs only; refer to page A-25)
PROFIBUS Screen Number (TPs only; refer to page A-27)
Editing BOOL Variables:
Set Bit (refer to page A-28)
Reset Bit (refer to page A-29)
Set/Reset Bit (refer to page A-30)
Initialize Bit in Startup (refer to page A-31)
Set BOOL Variable (refer to page A-32)
Reset BOOL Variable (refer to page A-33)
Transferring and Editing Data Records (Implemented on Standard
Screen):
Data Record: PLC > OP
Data Record: DAT > OP
Data Record: PLC > OP/DAT
Data Record: OP > DAT
Data Record: OP > PLC
Data Record: DAT > OP/PLC
Select Data Record
Edit Data Record
Delete Data Record
Format DAT Medium
Date and Time:
Date and Time (refer to page A-34)
Date Display/Edit (refer to page A-35)
Time Display/Edit (refer to page A-36)
A-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Parameters for Print Screen and Printing (Implemented on Standard

Screen):
Printer Parameters
Printer Parameters (Anchor)
Color Assignment for Printer
Print Screen Parameters
Prt. Screen Param. (Anchor)
Print Functions:
Automatic Graphics Printing (refer to page A-37)
Print Screen List (refer to page A-38)
Graphics Mode for Print Screen List (refer to A-39)
Start/Stop Print Screen (refer to page A-40)
Editing Messages:
Display Events (refer to page A-41)
Change EM Page/Buffer (refer to page A-42)
Event Window (refer to page A-43)
Events Delete Buffer (refer to page A-45)
Message Log ON/OFF (refer to page A-46)
Display Messages (refer to page A-47)
Message Filter (refer to page A-49)
Buffer Overflow (refer to page A-52)
Change AM Page/Buffer (refer to page A-53)
Alarms Delete Buffer (refer to page A-54)
Display Alarms (refer to page A-55)
Alarms Display First/Last (refer to page A-56)
Editing Passwords (Implemented on Standard Screen):
Define Password
Define Password Level
Enter Password
Display Passwords
Status/Force Variable (implemented on Standard Screen; OPs only):
S5: Status/Force Init_1
S5/S7: Select Status/Force
S5/S7: Deselect Status/Force
S5/S7: Status Variable
S5/S7: Status Start/Stop
S5: Force Variable
S7: Force Variable
S5/S7: Force Input
Scaling:
Scaling Linear 1 (refer to page A-57)
Scaling Linear 2 (refer to page A-58)
Scaling Square 1 (refer to page A-59)
Scaling Square 2 (refer to page A-60)
Variable: Value Minus/Plus (refer to page A-61)
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-3
Backup/Restore Module (not TP27)
Usage
Z_Backup
You use this function to write data from data areas of the TP or OP to the
memory card or from the memory card to the data areas of the TP or OP. There
are three data areas:
Firmware,
Configuration,
Data records.
Attaching to the Initializations entry point

Objective
You want to load a configuration automatically from the memory card onto the
TP or OP when the TP or OP starts up in order, for example, to download configuration data onto another TP or OP without using a configuration computer.
To configure
Choose System Functions from the menu to attach the function to the
Initializations entry point. Enter the following parameters:
Constant: Direction: 1
Constant: : 0 or 1
Execution
1. Insert the memory card holding the data you want to load into the TP or OP.
2. Start the TP or OP. The TP or OP detects the inserted memory card upon
starting up.
3. Confirm the prompt as to whether a Restore operation should be performed
by clicking OK. While starting up, the TP or OP loads the stored data (firmware/configuration/data records) into the internal memory.
4. Withdraw the memory card from the device so that the TP or OP does not
have to perform another Restore operation for the memory card the next
time it starts up.
Assigning to a function key, a soft key or a button

Objective
You want to write, by means of two keys, data records from the TP or OP to
the memory card or from the memory card to the TP or OP.
To configure
Select the key to be set for the direction TP or OP > module. Select the Bakkup/Restore Module function and define the following parameters.
Constant applicable to the TP or OP > module direction: Direction: 0 and
Constant applicable to the Data Records data area: Scope: 2.
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant Direction: use
1 as the value, and for the constant Scope: use 2 as the value.
Execution
A-4
The function is triggered as soon as one of the keys is pressed. The constants
are evaluated, and the data records are written, depending on the direction, to
either the memory card or the TP or OP.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Attaching to the variable of an input/output field

Objective
You wish to write data records from the TP or OP to the memory card using an
input/output field on the screen.
To configure
Create an input/output field having a random variable on a screen. For this variable, configure the function you selected, Backup/Restore Module. The following parameters apply:
Constant: Direction: 0
Constant: Scope: 2
Execution
Whenever the value in the input or output field is modified, the function is triggered and the value of the constant is evaluated. The TP or OP data records are
written to the memory card.
Parameters
Constant for Direction with

0 = TP or OP > module
1 = Module > TP or OP
Constant for Scope with
0 = firmware + configuration + data records
1 = firmware + configuration
2 = Data records.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-5
Mode
Usage
Z_Settings
You use this function to change the mode on the TP or OP. There are five
modes:
Online
Offline
Serial Download
Loop-through Mode and
MPI Download.

Objective
You wish to set one of the modes Online, Offline, Serial Download and Loopthrough Mode using four keys. You wish to be able to see the operating mode
you set on the screen.
To configure
Select the key which you want to use to set the first mode. Select the Mode
function and set the following parameters.
a constant for Online mode: Mode (Key): 0 and

a random local variable (No PLC ): Mode (Field).
Proceed in a similar manner for the other three keys. For the constant, use the
values corresponding to the operating modes: 1, 2 and 3. For the variable,
always use the same variable.
So that you can recognize the operating mode you selected on the screen, configure a symbolic output field to which the variable that you configured above
is assigned. Further, create a text list to whose values 0 to 3 the Online, Offline,
Serial Download and Loop-Through Connection operating modes are assigned.
Execution
A-6
The function is triggered as soon as one of the keys is pressed. The constant is
evaluated, and the corresponding operating mode is set on the TP or OP. The
value of the constant is transferred to the variable, and the output field is updated.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97

Objective
You wish to change modes using a symbolic input/output field on the screen.
To configure
Create a symbolic input/output field having a random local variable on a

screen. For this variable, configure the function you selected, Mode, to which
the following parameter applies:
Local variable: Mode (Field).
Specify for the function the same variable for which you configure the function.
Example:
Configure the MODUS variable. Set the Mode function for this
variable. As the parameter for this function, select the same variable for Mode (Field): MODUS an.
For the constant Mode (Key): 0 is entered by ProTool as the value. However,
this value is not evaluated for a function via a variable.
Further, create a text list to whose values 0 to 3 the Online, Offline, Serial
Download and Loop-through Connection operating modes are assigned.
Execution
The selected mode is displayed in the symbolic input/output field. Select another operating mode from the list box. The function is triggered. The value of
the variable is evaluated, and the corresponding operating mode is set on the
TP or OP. The input/output field is updated.
Parameters
Local variable for displaying Mode (Field)

Constant for Mode (Key) with
0 = Online
1 = Offline
2 = Serial Download
3 = Loop-through Mode
5 = MPI Download
Conditions
The variable of the function must have INTEGER format.
Tip
Use only local variables not having a link to the PLC for the input/output field
variable. Since modes are changed immediately upon input, possibly without
transferring the variable to the PLC, the old value is read from the PLC upon
restarting after a change of modes.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-7
Select Screen
Usage
This function is used to call another screen.

Objective
You wish to select another screen using a button.
To configure
Select the key which you want to use to select the screen. At the selected function Select Screen, you configure the parameter Screen Name:.
Execution
As soon as you operate the key, the function is triggered and the contents of the
parameter Screen Name: is evaluated. The corresponding screen is shown on
the display.

Objective
You want to select another screen using an input or output field.
To configure
Create an input or output field having a random variable on a screen. For this
variable, configure the function you selected, Select Screen, and configure its
Screen Name: parameter.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input or output field changes. The contents of the parameter Screen Name: are evaluated and there is a
change of screens.
Parameters
Screen name
A-8
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Dynamic Screen Selection 1
Usage
This function is used to call other screens.

The Dynamic Screen Selection 1 function can be assigned to the variable of an
input/output field.
Objective
You want to select other screens by means of an input/output field.
To configure
Create an input/output field having a random variable on a screen. For this

variable, configure the function you selected, Dynamic Screen Selection 1.
Execution
Enter the screen number of the screen you require in the input/output field. The
function is triggered as soon a value is applied. The contents of the variable are
evaluated, and the screen is refreshed.
Parameters
None
Conditions
The variable for which the function is configured must have CHAR or
INTEGER format.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-9
Dynamic Screen Selection 2
Usage
This function is used to call other screens. Specify the screen number for the
screen you wish to call by means of an operator input on the TP or OP or by
means of the PLC.
The Dynamic Screen Selection 2 function can be
assigned to a key (function key, soft key or button)
attached to a variable of an input/output field (corresponds to Dynamic
Screen Selection 1)

Objective
You want to select a different screen by means of a key (function key or button). Specify the screen you wish to change to by means of its screen number.
To configure
Select the key which you want to use to select the screen. Assign the Dynamic
Screen Selection 2 function to the key. For the parameter, specify the variable
to which the screen number is to be written.
You have to configure an input field before you can enter a screen number on a
screen. Assign the variable for the screen number to the input field. To allow
the operator to call a situation-dependent screen, you can also write the screen
number to the variable from the PLC. In this instance, the variable must be
linked to the PLC.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed and the corresponding
screen is displayed on the TP or OP.

Objective
You wish to select another screen using a button.
To configure
Create an input field having a random variable on a screen. Assign the

Dynamic Screen Selection 2 function to the variable. In this instance, do not
specify any function parameters.
Execution
The corresponding screen is called as soon as the operator types the screen
number and enters it by pressing ENTER.
Parameters
Variable for Screen number
A-10
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Select Previous Screen
Usage
You use the Select Previous Screen function to return to the screen you selected
previously.
Objective
You wish to return to the screen called previously by means of a key.
To configure
Assign the function to a key or button.
Execution
The screen called previously is selected when you press the key.
Parameters
None
Tip
Take note of the following tips to ensure that the Select Previous Screen
function does not finish in an endless loop:
Use the function only for screens which do not switch to other screens.
Do not use the function for screens which are called simultaneously by
means of the PLC job Select Screen.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-11
Blank Screen
Usage
With this function, the backlighting of the screen is switched off after a set
period of time if there is no operator input on the TP or OP. The backlighting is
switched on again when a key is pressed on the TP or OP. This means you can
significantly prolong the life of the backlighting.
Attaching to the Initializations entry point

Objective
You wish to blank the screen on the TP or OP automatically if there is no input

by the operator.
To configure
Choose System Functions from the menu to attach the function to the
Initializations entry point. Using the parameter Idle Time, set the time (0 to 50
minutes) after which you want the screen to be blanked if there is no operator
input within this time.
Execution
The function is initiated and the Idle Time parameter is evaluated as soon as
you power up the TP or OP. If the operator has not made an input on the TP or
OP by the end of the idle time, the screen is blanked. The time count starts
following any input made by the operator on the TP or OP.

Objective
You wish to blank the screen on the TP or OP immediately by means of a key.
To configure
Select the key which you want to use to blank the screen. At the selected Blank
Screen function, configure the Idle Time parameter. The value of this parameter
is, however, not evaluated when the function is attached to a key.
Execution
As soon as you operate the key, the function is triggered and the screen is
blanked.
Parameters
Constant for Idle Time (in minutes).
Tip
The type of blanking circuit depends on the device. With the OP27 and TP27,
the intensity of the backlighting is reduced so much that you can still read the
contents of the screen. On all other devices, the backlighting is turned off completely.
A-12
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Scroll UP
Usage
With this function you scroll up one page in the following displays:
message page
message buffer
text lists
password list
With the Scroll UP function, you scroll one page at a time instead of one line at
a time using the cursor.
To configure
Assign the function to a key (function key, soft key or button).
Execution
You scroll up one page in the display when you press the key.
Parameters
None
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-13
Scroll DOWN
Usage
With this function you scroll down one page in the following displays:
message page
message buffer
text lists
password list
With the Scroll DOWN function, you scroll one page at a time instead of one
line at a time using the cursor.
To configure
Assign the function to a key (function key, soft key or button).
Execution
You scroll down one page in the display when you press the key.
Parameters
None
A-14
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Language
Z_Settings
Usage
You use this function to change the language on the TP or OP. This means that
system text and all items of configured text are displayed in the new language
that you select.
Basic facts
You create your configuration in different languages. However, only three

languages can be downloaded to the TP or OP. You define these languages by
choosing System Language Assignment. The TP or OP detects how many
languages have been downloaded and assigns the numbers 0, 1 and 2 to the
languages in the order in which they were configured. This number is used
again when the function is configured.

Objective
You wish to toggle between three languages A, B and C by means of three

keys. You wish to be able to see which language you have set on the screen.
To configure
Select the key which you want to use to set language A. Select the Language
function and define the following parameters.
Constant applicable to language A: Language (Key): 0 and

a variable: Language (Field).
Proceed in a similar manner for the other two keys. For the constant, use the
values corresponding to the languages: 1 and 2. For the variable, always use
the same variable.
So that you can recognize the selected language on the screen, configure a
symbolic output field to which the variable that you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 to 2 to the languages A,
B and C.
Execution
evaluated, and the corresponding language is set on the TP or OP. The value of
the constant is transferred to the variable, and the output field is updated.
Special features
You can use a toggle function. In this instance you use a key to switch between
languages A, B and C. You configure in the manner described above, the only
difference being that you define just one key. For the constant, you specify a
value of 1. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and you toggle
between the three languages: A > B > C > A.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-15
Tip
If you
use the function by pressing a key and
have configured a symbolic output field to display the language, and
you later modify with regard to the TP or OP languages:
their order
their number or
their grouping
you must remember to make the corresponding adjustments to your text list.

Objective
You wish to toggle between three languages A, B and C by means of a

symbolic input/output field on the screen.
To configure
Create a symbolic input/output field having a variable on a screen. For this

variable, configure the function you selected, Language, to which the following parameter applies:
Variable: Language (Field).
Use the same variable for the input/output field and for the function. For the
constant, Language (Key): 0 is entered by ProTool as the value. However, this
value is not evaluated by a function using a variable.
Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 to 2 to the languages A, B and C.
Execution
The selected language is displayed in the symbolic input/output field. Using

the list box, select another language. The function is triggered. The value of the
variable is evaluated, and the corresponding language is set on the TP or OP.
The input/output field is updated.
Parameters
Variable for displaying Language (Field)

Constant for Language (Key) with
0 = language 1
1 = language 2
2 = language 3
1 = Toggle (Language 1 > 2 > 3 > 1).
Conditions
A-16
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Display Information Text (TPs Only)
Usage
Z_Settings
This function is used to display the information text on the current screen. The
Display Information Text function is available only on Touch Panels.
The Display Information Text function can be assigned to a button.
Objective
You want to call configured information text for the current screen on the TP
by means of a button.
To configure
Configure a button with which you want to call the information text. Assign
the Display Information Text function to the button.
Execution
The information text is displayed on the screen as soon as you touch the button. A system message draws your attention to the fact that information text
has not been configured for the current screen.
Parameters
None
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-17
Adjust Contrast (TP27 Only)
Usage
Z_Settings
You use this function to adjust the contrast of the screen. The Adjust Contrast
function is available only on the TP27.
The Adjust Contrast function can be assigned to a button.
Objective
You want to increase and reduce the contrast of the screen on the TP27 by
means of a button for each option.
To configure
Configure two buttons. Assign the Adjust Contrast function to the two buttons.
Enter the following parameters:
0 = Reduce contrast
1 = Increase contrast
Execution
The contrast is increased or reduced by one level whenever you touch one of
the two buttons.
Parameters
Constant
Tip
The function is not operative on devices having a TFT display (active control).
A-18
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Acoustic Signal (TPs Only)
Usage
Z_Settings
This function enables or disables the acoustic acknowledgement of operation

of a touch-sensitive control (button or input field) on the TP. The Acoustic
Signal function is only available on TPs.
The Acoustic Signal function may be assigned to a button or a variable of an
input/output field.
Attaching to a button
Objective
You wish to switch the acoustic signal for operation of a button or input field
by means of a button.
To configure
Configure a button and assign the Acoustic Signal function to it.
Execution
Output of the acoustic signal alternates between the following states when the
button is touched:
TP37
On Off
TP27
Loud Quiet Off

Objective
You wish to switch the acoustic signal for operation of a button or an input
field by means of an input/output field.
To configure
Create an input/output field with a random variable on a screen. Configure the

Acoustic Signal function for this variable.
Execution
As soon as the value of the variable changes, output of the acoustic signal is
switched alternately between the following states:
TP37
On Off
TP27
Loud Quiet Off
Parameters
None
Tip
When the TP is restarted, the acoustic signal is enabled by default.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-19
Touch Calibration (TP37 Only)
Usage
Z_Settings
You use this function to calibrate the touch-sensitive screen of the TP37. The
Touch Calibration function is available only on the TP37.
The Touch Calibration function can be assigned to a button.
Objective
You wish to calibrate the touch screen of the TP37 by means of a button.
To configure
Configure a button and assign the Touch Calibration function to it.
Execution
The calibration window on the TP37 opens when the button is touched.
Operator prompting is in English. The TP37 prompts you to touch three points
in succession: top left , bottom right and top right. If the TP37 detects invalid
touches, the calibration operation is restarted.
The setting is saved on the TP37 so that it is safe even in the event of a power
failure.
Parameters
None
Tip
To protect the TP from unauthorized handling, you should assign a password

level > 0 to the touch calibration button.
A-20
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Set Bit in Word
Usage
You use this function to set a bit in the word of a variable. The variable is
The Set Bit in Word function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a
button.
Objective
You want to set a bit in the word of a variable by means of a key. The variable
will then be transferred to the PLC.
To configure
Select the key with which you want to set a bit in the word of a variable. Select
the Set Bit in Word function and define the following parameters
a control variable applicable to the word: Word:
a constant applicable to the bit: Bit:
Execution
The function is triggered and the parameters are evaluated as soon as the key is
operated. The corresponding bit is then set in the word of the variable, and the
variable is transferred to the PLC.
Parameters
Variable for Word

Constant for bit number
Conditions

The value of the variable must not be modified by the PLC.
Tip
When using the Set Bit in Word function, the bits must not be modified by the
PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be specified for the variable, either.
Avoid using the Set Bit in Word function with PLCs which support BOOL
variables for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the Set Bit function for
BOOL variables.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-21
Reset Bit in Word
Usage
You use this function to reset a bit in the word of a variable. The variable is
The Reset Bit in Word function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or
a button.
Objective
You want to reset a bit in the word of a variable by means of a key. The
variable will then be transferred to the PLC.
To configure
Select the key with which you want to reset a bit in the word of a variable.
Select the Reset Bit in Word function and define the following parameters:
Execution
operated. The corresponding bit is then reset in the word of the variable, and
the variable is transferred to the PLC.
Parameters
Variable for Word

Conditions

Tip
When using the Reset Bit in Word function, the bits must not be modified by
the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be
specified for the variable, either.
Avoid using the Reset Bit in Word function with PLCs which support BOOL
variables for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the Reset Bit function for
BOOL variables.
A-22
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Set/Reset Bit in Word
Usage
You use this function to set a bit in the word of a variable or to reset a bit in the
word of a variable. The variable is transferred to the PLC.
The Set/Reset Bit in Word function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key
or a button.
Objective
You want to set and reset a bit in the word of variable by means of a key. The
variable will then be transferred to the PLC.
To configure
Select the key with which you want to set and reset a bit in the word of a variable. Select the Set/Reset Bit in Word function and set the following parameters:
Execution
variable is transferred to the PLC. If you press the key a second time, the corresponding bit is reset, and so on.
Parameters
Variable for Word

Conditions
The variable of the function must have INTEGER KF format.

Tip
When using the Set/Reset Bit in Word function, the bits must not be modified
by the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not
be specified for the variable, either.
Avoid using the Set/Reset Bit in Word function with PLCs which support
BOOL variables for example, SIMATIC S7). Instead, use the Set/Reset Bit
function for BOOL variables.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-23
Set Bit When Key is Pressed
Usage
You use this function to set a bit in the word of a variable. The bit remains set
until the key is released.
The Set Bit When Key is Pressed function can be assigned to a function key, a
soft key or a button.
Objective
You wish to set a bit in a word of a variable by means of a single key for such
time until you release the key.
To configure
Select the key with which you want to set a bit in the word of a variable. Select
the Set Bit When Key is Pressed function and define the following parameters:
Execution
variable is transferred to the PLC. The bit remains set until the key is released.
Parameters
Variable for Word

Conditions

Tip
When using the Set Bit When Key is Pressed function, the bits must not be
modified by the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be specified for the variable, either.
If you have also configured the PLC job Select Screen, it may occur just
when the key having the Set Bit When Key is Pressed function is pressed on
the TP or OP. In this case the set bit cannot be reset when the key is released since the key assignment cannot be modified after the screen has been
changed.
Configure, therefore, the Reset Bit function for the screen with the Leave
Screen execution condition. This means that the bit is reset when you leave
the screen.
Avoid using the Set Bit When Key is Pressed function with PLCs which
support BOOL variables for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the two
functions Set Bit with the execution condition Press Key and Reset Bit with
the execution condition Release Key.
A-24
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Direct Key (TPs Only)
Usage
You use this function to implement shortcuts on the TP without communication-related delays. Shortcuts are, for example, a condition for typewriter
mode. The Direct Key function is only available on TPs.
The Direct Key function can be assigned to a button.
DP direct keys
Objective
You want to set bits in the I/O area of a SIMATIC S7 directly on the TP.
Conditions
1. You installed ProTool as integrated when you compiled the configuration.

2. The Touch Panel is connected during operation to a SIMATIC S7 via the
PROFIBUS-DP.
3. You have defined in STEP 7 the bit area for direct keys (refer to the
Communication Users Guide for configuration).
If these requirements are not fulfilled, ProTool interprets the configured button
as a direct key for driving the direct key module.
To configure
Configure a button which you want to use as a direct key. Assign the Direct
Key function to the button. Specify as the parameter the number of the bit
which you require to be set when the key is pressed. Permissible bit numbers:
TP37:
0 to 39
TP27:
0 to 23
Execution
The bit is set when the direct key is set and reset when the key is released or
when you leave the screen.
Direct keys for direct key module

Objective
You want to drive the ports of the optional direct key module of the TP by
means of a button.
Conditions
The TP is equipped with a direct key module and the requirements for DP
direct keys are not met.
To configure
Configure a button which you want to use as a direct key. Assign the Direct
Key function to the button. Specify as the parameter the number of the port
which you require to be set when the key is pressed. Permissible port numbers:
TP37:
1 to 16
TP27:
1 to 8
Execution
The bit is set when the direct key is touched and reset when the key is released
or when you leave the screen.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-25
Parameters
Constant for port/bit number
Tip
The Direct Key function can be used only once per button. Simultaneous use of
DP direct keys for the direct key module is not possible within the same
project.
A-26
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
PROFIBUS Screen Number (TPs Only)

Usage
If DP direct keys use identical bits for different functions on different screens,
the S7 has to differentiate between the functionalities concerned by means of
the screen number. To avoid a delay in updating the screen number on the PLC
following a change of screens, there is the PROFIBUS Screen Number function.
Since the screen number in the screen number area is updated via the standard
clock pulse following a change of screens but the bits have to be set immediately in the I/O area of the PLC, the assignment of control bit and screen number is not always clear.
Using the PROFIBUS Screen Number function, you can set random bits within
the bit area for direct keys for identification of the screen and simultaneously
transfer them with the direct key bits to the PLC. This means that a clear assignment between control bit and screen number is ensured at all times.
Depending on the mapping of the bits, different numbers of shortcut functions
are available to you:
TP37:
for example 400 (20 screens each with 20 direct keys)
or 256 (8 screens each with 32 direct keys)
TP27:
for example 144 (12 screens each with 12 direct keys)
or 80 (4 screens each with 20 direct keys)
The PROFIBUS Screen Number function is assigned to a screen.
Objective
You are using DP direct keys in your configuration and want to use the same
bit on several screens for different tasks.
To configure
Choose Screen Attributes from the menu and assign the PROFIBUS Screen
Number function to the screen. Specify as the parameter a PROFIBUS bit
which you require to have reserved for the screen number and to be set when
the key is pressed. Permissible bit numbers:
TP37:
0 to 39
TP27:
0 to 23
If you assign the PROFIBUS Screen Number function several times to the
screen, you can define a random bit pattern for the screen number.
Execution
The bits are set when the screen is opened and reset upon leaving the screen.
Parameters
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-27
Set Bit
Usage (not for

SIMATIC S5)
You use this function to set a variable.
Objective
You wish to set a variable by means of a key.
To configure
Select the key you wish to use for setting a variable. Select the Set Bit function
and set the following parameters
the control variable: Bit:
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. When you do so, the
variable is set.
Special features
With this function you require a separate function key or button for every
variable you wish to set. Depending on the key you press, the corresponding
variable is set.
Compare the Set BOOL Variable function, with which you can set different
BOOL variables by means of a single key.
Parameters
Variable for Bit
Conditions
The variable of the function must have BOOL format.
Tip
Do not use a local variable since the function cannot then be executed.
A-28
The Set Bit function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a button.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Reset Bit
Usage (not for

SIMATIC S5)
You use this function to reset a variable.
Objective
You want to reset a variable by means of a key.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to reset a variable. Select the Reset Bit
function and set the following parameters:
Execution
variable is reset.
Special features
With this function you require a separate function key or button for every variable you wish to reset. Depending on the key that you press, the corresponding variable is reset.
Compare the Reset BOOL Variable function with which you reset different
BOOL variables by means of a single key.
Parameters
Variable for Bit
Conditions
Tip
Do not use a local variable since the function cannot then be executed.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
The Reset Bit function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a button.
A-29
Set/Reset Bit
Usage (not for

SIMATIC S5)
You can use this function to set to reset a variable.
Objective
You wish to set and reset a variable by means of a key.
To configure
Select the key with which you want to set and reset a variable. Select the
Set/Reset Bit function and define the following parameters
Execution
variable is set. If you press the key a second time, the bit is reset. The reason
for this is that it is a toggle function.
Parameters
Variable for Bit
Conditions
A-30
The Set/Reset Bit function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a
button.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Initialize Bit in Startup
Usage
With this function you assign a specific status to a variable when the TP or OP
starts up.
The Initialize Bit in Startup function can be assigned to a function key, a soft
key or a button.
Objective
You deliberately wish to place a variable in a specific state when the TP or OP

starts up for example, in order to determine on the PLC whether the TP or
OP has started up.
To configure
Create a random variable. For this variable, configure the function you selected, Initialize Bit in Startup, to which the following parameter applies:
Constant: Status after System Startup: 1
Proceed in a similar manner if you specifically wish to reset a variable in the
TP or OP. Appropriately, use 0 as the value for the constant.
Execution
The TP or OP starts up. The function is triggered, and the value of the constant
is evaluated at the same time. The variable is set or reset.
Parameters
Constant for status following system startup with

0 = FALSE, reset
1 = TRUE, set
Conditions
The variable for which the function is configured must have BOOL format.
With the SIMATIC S5, therefore, the variable can only be a local variable.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-31
Set Bool Variable (OPs Only)
Usage
With this function you set a BOOL variable. To do so, the cursor must be located in an input field for which this BOOL variable was configured.
The Set BOOL Variable function can be assigned to a function key or a soft
key.
Objective
You wish to set a BOOL variable by means of a key.
To configure
Configure an input field, to which you assign a BOOL variable. Select the key
you wish to use for setting a BOOL variable. Assign the Set BOOL Variable
function to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered whenever the key is pressed and the cursor is located
in the input field. The BOOL variable is then set.
Special features
With this function you can set different BOOL variables by means of a single
key. To do this, configure several input fields, to which you assign BOOL
variables. Depending on the position of the cursor, the corresponding BOOL
variables are set when the key is pressed.
Compare the Set Bit function, for which you require a separate function key or
button for every bit that you wish to set.
Parameters
None
Conditions
A-32
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Reset Bool Variable (OPs Only)
Usage
With this function you reset a BOOL variable. To do so, the cursor must be
positioned in an input field for which this BOOL variable was configured.
The Reset BOOL Variable function can be assigned to a function key or a soft
key.
Objective
You wish to reset a BOOL variable by means of a key.
To configure
Configure an input field, to which you assign a BOOL variable. Select the key
you wish to use for resetting a BOOL variable. Assign the Reset BOOL
Variable function to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered whenever the key is pressed and the cursor is positioned in the input field. The BOOL variable is then reset.
Special features
With this function you can reset different BOOL variables by means of a single
key. To do this, configure several input fields, to which you assign BOOL
variables. Depending on the position of the cursor, the corresponding BOOL
variables are reset when the key is pressed.
Compare the Reset Bit function, for which you require a separate function key
or button for every bit that you wish to reset.
Parameters
None
Conditions
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-33
Date and Time
Usage
With this function you display for a few seconds a line containing the current
date and the current time of the TP or OP. The display appears on the
OP on a line
TP in a window
The Date and Time function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a
button.
Objective
You wish to display a line containing the current date and the current time by
means of a key.
To configure
Select the key you wish to use for displaying a window containing the date and
time. Assign the Date and Time function to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The window containing
the date and time is displayed and disappears again a short time later.
Parameters
None
A-34
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Date Display/Edit
Usage
Z_Settings
With this function you show the current date of the TP or OP. At this point you
can also modify the date.
The Date input/output function can be attached to a variable.
Objective
You wish to view the current date and modify it, if necessary.
To configure

variable, configure the function you selected, Date Display/Edit.
Execution
The date is displayed in the input/output field. If the cursor is positioned in the
input/output field, you can modify the date.
Special features
Use the same variable for all the date fields. Only then are changes made by
the operator displayed and updated in all the fields.
Parameters
None
Conditions
The variable for which the function is configured must have the KC or
STRING format. For this, the input/output field must contain String format.
Tip
The field length of the input/output field must be at least ten for it to be
possible to enter the complete date.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-35
Time Display/Edit
Usage
Z_Settings
With this function you show the current time of the TP or OP. At this point you
can also modify the time.
The Time input/output function can be attached to a variable.
Objective
You wish to view the current time and modify it, if necessary.
To configure
Create an input/output field having a random variable. For this variable, configure the function you selected, Time Display/Edit function.
Execution
The time is displayed in the input/output field. If the cursor is positioned in the
input/output field, you can modify the time.
Special features
Use the same variable for all the time fields. Only then will changes made by
the operator be displayed in all the fields.
Parameters
None
Conditions
The variable for which the function is configured must have KC or STRING
format. For this, the input/output field must contain String as its format.
Tip
The field length of the input/output field must be at least eight for it to be
possible to enter the complete time.
A-36
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Automatic Graphics Printing

Usage
This function is used to print all print jobs on the TP or OP (messages, screenprint etc.) specifically for a language in graphics mode. The function does not
affect any other language in the configuration.
Objective
In your configuration, you are using a language with graphic characters which
cannot be represented as ASCII characters. You therefore require all the print
jobs in that language to be performed on the TP or OP in graphics mode.
To configure
The Automatic Graphics Printing function is a global function (refer to page

9-5). Choose System Functions from the menu to link the function to the
Initializations entry point. Enter for the parameter the number (13) of the language for which automatic graphics printing is to apply. The language number
follows the order in which they were configured under System Language
Assignment.
Execution
If the language set as the parameter on the TP or OP is active, all print jobs are
printed automatically in graphics mode.
Parameters
Constant for Language (13).
Tip
Graphics printing is far slower than ASCII printing.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-37
Print Screen List
Usage
With this function you print a screen list which you have set in your configuration.

Objective
You wish to print a screen list comprising three screens by means of a single
key.
To configure
Select the key which you want to use to initiate printing of the screen list.
Select the Print Screen List function and set the following parameters.
Constant applicable to the page of the printout: Page 1 > screen number
The default settings of all other constants contain 1. Do not modify these
values.
Execution
operated. The corresponding screens are then printed.

Objective
You wish to print a screen list comprising three screens by means of an input/
output field.
To configure

variable, configure the function you selected, Print Screen List, and set the
following parameters:
The default settings of all other constants contain 1. Do not modify these
values.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding screens are then
printed.
Parameters
Constant for
A-38
Page 1 > screen number

...
Page 20 > screen number
1 ... x = screen number
1
= not assigned
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Graphics Mode for Print Screen List

Usage
With this function you print a screen, which is output when the screen list is
printed, in graphics mode. This means that you can see in the printout, for
example, the trends or bar graphs current at the time of printing.
The Graphics Mode for Print Screen List function can be assigned to a screen.
Objective
You want to print a screen, which is output when the screen list is being
printed, automatically in graphics mode.
To configure
Choose Screen Attributes from the menu and assign the Graphics Mode for
Print Screen List function to the screen. You do not have to specify a parameter.
Execution
If the Graphics Mode for Print Screen List function has been configured for a
screen and if you want the screen to be output when the list is printed (refer to
page A-38), the screen is printed automatically in graphics mode.
Parameters
None
Tip
Graphics printing is far slower than ASCII printing.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-39
Start/Stop Print Screen
Usage
With this function you print the current screen.

The Start/Stop Print Screen function can be assigned to a function key, a soft
key or a button.
Objective
You wish to print the current screen.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to initiate a screenprint. Assign the Start/
Stop Print Screen function to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The current screen is
printed. If you press the key a second time, the print function is aborted.
Parameters
None
Tip
The setting of the Print Screen parameters on the standard Z_PRINTER screen
is applied here.
A-40
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Display Events
Usage
This function is used to open the event message page and the event buffer.
Press ESC to exit from the function and hide the event message page and the
event buffer.
The Display Events function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a
button.
Objective
You wish to select the event message page and the event message buffer by
means of two keys.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to select the event message page. Under
the function you selected, Display Events, set the following parameters:
Constant for displaying: page or buffer: 0
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant, use the corresponding value to display the event message buffer: 1.
Execution
The function is triggered whenever you press one of the keys, and the value of
the constants is evaluated. The event message page or the event buffer is
opened.
Parameters
Constant for Page or Buffer where

0= Page
1 = Buffer
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-41
Change EM Page/Buffer
Usage
With this function you always open the event message page first. Every time
the function is triggered thereafter, it toggles between the event message page
and the event buffer. Press ESC to exit from the function and hide the event
message page or the event buffer.
The Change EM Page/Buffer function can be assigned to a function key.
Objective
You wish to select the event message page by means of a key and, whenever
the key is pressed, toggle between the event message page and the event buffer.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to select the event message page. Assign
the Change EM Page/Buffer to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The event message page
is opened. Every time the key is pressed thereafter, it toggles between the event
message page and the event buffer.
Parameters
None
Conditions
This function is allowed only for function keys (Kx).
Tip
Never use (Fx) soft keys, since all the soft keys are disabled on the event page
and you therefore cannot toggle between the event page and the event buffer.
A-42
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Event Window
Usage
Z_Messages
With this function you open and hide the event window.

Objective
You wish to open and hide the event window by means of two keys.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to display the event window. Under the
function you selected, Event Window, set the following parameters:
Constant for displaying: ON/OFF: 1
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant, use the corresponding value for hiding the event window, i.e. 0.
Execution
the constants is evaluated. The event window is opened or hidden accordingly.
Special features
You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you open and hide the event
window by means of a single key. You configure in the manner described
above, the only difference being that you define just one key. For the constant,
specify a value of 1. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and the
event window is enabled. If you press the key a second time, the event window
is disabled, and so on.

Objective
You wish to open and hide the event window by means of an input or an output
field.
To configure
variable, configure the function you selected, Event Window, to which the
following parameter applies:
Constant for displaying: ON/OFF: 1
Execution
As soon as the value changes in the input or output field, the function is
triggered and the value of the constants is then evaluated. The event window is
opened or hidden accordingly.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-43
Special features
You can also open and hide the event window by means of two input or output
fields, which may even be located on different screens. To do this, configure
two input or output fields (as described above). For the constant, specify 1 as
the value on the first occasion and 0 as the value on the other occasion.
As soon as the values in the input or output field are modified, the function is
triggered, and the event window is opened or hidden accordingly.
Proceed as follows to trigger the function by means of the PLC:
Configure a control variable and set it to Read Continuously. Define the Event
Window function for this variable. Select the condition for execution called
Specify Value from the Conditions in the Functions dialog box. The function is
triggered whenever the value is modified by the PLC.
Parameters
A-44
Constant for ON/OFF where

0 = OFF
1 = ON
1 = switch (OFF <> ON)
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Events Delete Buffer
Usage
Z_Messages
With this function you delete the event messages from the buffer. All messages
that are still waiting to be serviced are not deleted.

Objective
You wish to delete the event buffer by means of a key.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to delete the event buffer. Assign the
Events Delete Buffer function to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The event buffer is
deleted.

Objective
You wish to delete the event buffer by means of an input or output field on the
screen.
To configure
variable, configure the function you selected, Events Delete Buffer.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input or output field
changes. The event buffer is deleted.
Parameters
None
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-45
Message Log ON/OFF
Usage
Z_Settings
With this function you enable and disable the automatic printout of messages.
Messages having the print attribute are printed whenever their status is modified (arrived, departed or acknowledged).
The Message Log ON/OFF function can be assigned to a function key, a soft
key or a button.
Objective
You wish to enable and disable the message log by means of two keys.
To configure
Select the key you wish to use for enabling the message log. Select the
Message Log ON/OFF function and set the following parameters.
a constant for enabling: ON/OFF (Key 1 and
a variable: ON/OFF (Field).
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant, use the corresponding value to disable the message log, i.e. 0. Always keep to the same
variable.
So that you can recognize on the screen whether the message log has been
enabled or disabled, configure a symbolic output field to which the variable
you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values
0 and 1 to the corresponding conditions OFF and ON.
Execution
evaluated, and the message log is enabled or disabled accordingly. The value of
the constant is transferred to the variable, and the output field is updated.
Special features
You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you enable and disable the
message log by means of a single key. You configure in the manner described
above, the only difference being that you define just one key. For the constant,
you specify a value of 1. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and
the message log is enabled. If you press the key a second time, the message log
is disabled.
Parameters
Variable for displaying ON/OFF (Field)

Constant for ON/OFF (Key) with
0 = OFF
1 = ON
1 = switch (ON <> OFF)
Conditions
A-46
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Display Messages
Usage
Event messages and alarm messages are displayed when they arrive. Using
parameters, you set the message type (alarm messages or event messages) you
want to have displayed and the messages (page or buffer) you want to have
displayed. The message page displays all the messages that are ready to be
displayed. The message buffer displays all message events (message arrived,
departed or acknowledged).
The Display Messages function can either be
appended to a screen.
Objective
You wish to use several keys to display event messages and alarm messages
which have arrived.
When a screen is called, you want its message page or its buffer to be open
already.
Appending the function to a screen makes the window for the buffer or page
smaller so that the icons for soft keys remain visible on the lower border of the
display. Once you have called this function on the TP or OP, the buffer and
page window remains permanently small.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to call the function. Under the function you
selected, Display Messages, set the following parameters:
Constant for message type:
alarm messages or event messages
Constant for display mode:
Page or buffer
Proceed in a similar manner to assign the other keys.
If you append this function to a screen, you have to configure the function by
choosing Screen Attributes from the menu.
Execution
By key:
The function is triggered whenever you press one of the keys. The constants
are evaluated.
By screen:
The function is triggered whenever you call the screen, and the constants are
evaluated.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-47
Parameters
Constant for message type:

0 = alarm messages
1 = event messages
Constant for display mode:
0 = message page
1 = message buffer
1 = switch between page and buffer
A-48
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Message Filter
Usage
If the alarm message page or the event message page opens on the TP or OP,
the messages displayed can be filtered using this function. With the filter you
can set the messages you want to have displayed.
You can set whether only messages of a certain priority or acknowledgment
group should be displayed or only diagnostic messages should be displayed.
The Message Filter function can either be:
appended to the variable of an input/output field.

Objective
You want to use several keys to filter the messages displayed on the message
page according to different criteria. This means that only the messages of immediate interest to you are displayed. For example, you want to display only
high-priority messages or only the messages in a particular acknowledgment
group.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to enable a filter. Under the function you
selected, Message Filter, set the following parameters:
Constant for enabling the filter:
Filter: 1
Constant for determining the priority:
Priority: 10
Leave the constants for the acknowledgment group and diagnostic
messages at 0
Random local variable (No PLC):
Status.
Proceed in a similar manner for the other keys. Leave the priority for the
constants at 0, for example, and specify 1 for the acknowledgment group.
Alays keep to the same variable.
Tip
If you have enabled the filter for diagnostic messages, the filter settings do not
apply to the priority and the acknowledgment group.
Displaying current
status
So that you can recognize the current filter on the screen, configure a symbolic
output field to which the variable configured above is assigned. Further, you
create a text list whose values 0 4 display the different enabled filters.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-49
Example of a text list:

0 = OFF
1 = priority
2 = acknowledgment group
3 = priority and acknowledgment group
4 = diagnostic messages
Execution
evaluated and the corresponding filter is enabled. In the aforementioned example, all messages starting from priority 10 are displayed when the message
page is called. The corresponding bit for the filter is set in the variable and the
output field is updated.

Objective
You want to enable the filter for displaying messages on the message page by
means of a symbolic input/output field.
To configure
Create a symbolic input/output field having a random local variable on a

screen. For this variable, configure the function you selected, Message Filter,
to which the following parameters apply:
Constant for enabling the filter:
Filter: 1
Constant for determining the priority:
Priority: 10
Leave the constants for the acknowledgment group and diagnostic
messages at 0
The variable is not evaluated.
Tip
If you have enabled the filter for diagnostic messages, the filter settings do not
apply to the priority and the acknowledgment group.
Displaying current
status
Further, create for the local variable a text list whose values 0 4 display the
different enabled filters.
Example of a text list:
0 = OFF
1 = priority
2 = acknowledgment group
3 = priority and acknowledgment group
4 = diagnostic messages
Execution
A-50
The current filter status is displayed in the symbolic input/output field. Select
another filter setting from the list box. The function is triggered. The value of
the variable is evaluated and the input/output field is updated. In the aforementioned example, all messages starting from priority 10 are displayed when the
message page is called.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Parameters
Constant for Filter:

0 = filter OFF
1 = filter ON
Constant for Priority:
0 = display all priorities
1...16 = lowest priority still shown
Constant for acknowledgment group:
0 = display all acknowledgment groups
1...16 = display only messages in this group
Constant for diagnostic messages:
0 = display all messages
1 = display only diagnostic messages
Variable for Status:
1st bit = priority (1 = filter enabled)
2nd bit= acknowledgment group (1 = filter enabled)
3rd bit = diagnostic messages (1 = filter enabled)
The figure shows an example of assigning the SIMATIC S5 and S7.
Variable for status

2 1 0
Bit
Diagnostic messages
Acknowledgment group
Priority
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-51
Buffer Overflow
Usage
Z_Settings
With this function you enable and disable a warning on buffer overflow.
The Buffer Overflow function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a
button.
Objective
You wish to enable and disable a warning on buffer overflow by means of two
keys.
To configure
Select the key you wish to use to enable output of a warning when a buffer
overflows. Select the Buffer Overflow function and set the following parameters.
a constant for enabling: ON/OFF (Key): 1 and
a variable: ON/OFF (Field).
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant, use the corresponding value to disable the message log, i.e. 0. Keep to the same variable.
To be able to recognize on the screen whether Buffer Overload has been enabled or disabled, configure a symbolic output field to which the variable you
configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0
and 1 to the corresponding conditions OFF and ON.
Execution
evaluated, and Warn on Buffer Overflow is enabled or disabled accordingly.
The value of the constant is transferred to the variable, and the output field is
updated.
Special features
You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you enable and disable a
warning on buffer overflow by means of a single key.
You configure in the manner described above, the only difference being that
you define just one key. For the constant, specify a value of 1. If you press the
key, the function is triggered and Warn on Buffer Overload is enabled. If the
key is pressed a second time, Warn on Buffer Overload is disabled, and so on.
Parameters
Variable displaying ON/OFF (Field)

Constant for ON/OFF (Key) with
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Conditions
A-52
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Change AM Page/Buffer
Usage
With this function you always open the alarm message page first. Every time
the function is triggered thereafter, it toggles between the alarm message page
and the alarm buffer. Press ESC to exit from the function and hide the alarm
message page or the alarm buffer.
The Change AM Page/Buffer function can be assigned to a function key or a
soft key.
Objective
You wish to select the alarm message page by means of a key and, whenever
the key is pressed, toggle between the alarm message page and the alarm
buffer.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to select the alarm message page. Assign
the Change AM Page/Buffer to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The alarm message
page is opened. Every time the key is pressed, it toggles between the alarm
message page and the alarm buffer.
Parameters
None
Conditions
This function is allowed only for function keys (Kx).
Tip
Never use (Fx) soft keys, since all the soft keys are disabled on the alarm
message page and you therefore cannot toggle between the alarm message
page and the alarm buffer.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-53
Alarms Delete Buffer
Usage
Z_Messages
With this function you delete the alarm messages from the buffer. All messages
which are waiting to be serviced or which have not been acknowledged are not
deleted.

Objective
You wish to delete the alarm buffer by means of a key.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to delete the alarm buffer. Assign the
Alarms Delete Buffer function to the Selected Functions.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The alarm buffer is
deleted.

Objective
You wish to delete the alarm buffer by means of an input or output field on the
screen.
To configure
variable, configure the function you selected, Alarms Delete Buffer.
Execution
The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input or output field
changes. The alarm buffer is deleted.
Parameters
None
A-54
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Display Alarms
Usage
This function is used to open the alarm message page and the alarm buffer.
Press ESC to exit from the function and hide the alarm message page or the
alarm buffer.
The Display Alarms function can be assigned to a function key, a soft key or a
button.
Objective
You wish to select the alarm message page or the alarm message buffer by
means of two keys.
To configure
Select the key with which you wish to select the alarm message page. Under
the function you selected, Display Alarms, set the following parameters:
Constant for displaying: page or buffer: 0
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant, use the
corresponding value to display the alarm message buffer: 1.
Execution
the constants is evaluated. The alarm message window or the alarm buffer is
opened.
Parameters
Constant for Page or Buffer where

0= page
1 = buffer
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-55
Alarms Display First/Last
Usage
Z_Settings
With this function you set whether the first or last message to arrive is displayed. This setting also affects display of the event page and of the event
message page and the alarm message page.
The Alarms Display First/Last function can be assigned to a function key, a
soft key or a button.
Objective
You wish to set, by means of two keys, whether the first or last message to
arrive should be displayed.
To configure
Select the key you want to use for setting the display to the last message to
arrive. Under the function you selected, Alarms Display First/Last, set the
following parameters:
Constant applicable to the Last setting : First/Last (Key): 0,
Variable: First/Last (Field).
Proceed in a similar manner for the second key. For the constant, use the corresponding value to display the first message to arrive, i.e. 1. Keep to the same
variable.
So that you can recognize whether the first or last message to arrive is being
displayed on the screen, configure a symbolic output field to which the variable that you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign
the values 0 and 1 to the corresponding conditions Last and First.
Execution
evaluated, and the first or last message to arrive is displayed accordingly. The
value of the constant is transferred to the variable, and the output field is updated.
Special features
You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you choose by means of a
single key whether the first or last message should be displayed. You configure
in the manner described above, the only difference being that you define just
one key. For the constant, you specify a value of 1. If you press the key, the
function is triggered, and the first message to arrive is displayed. If the key is
pressed a second time, the last message to arrive is displayed, and so on.
Parameters
Variable displaying First/Last (Field),

Constant for First/Last (Key) with
0 = last
1 = first
1 = switch (first <> last)
Conditions
A-56
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Scaling Linear 1
Usage
With this function values are scaled linearly. Values from the PLC are scaled
prior to being displayed on the TP or OP. Inputs on the TP or OP are scaled
prior to the values being transferred to the PLC.
Scaling formula: Y = a X + b.
The Scaling Linear 1 function is the inverse function of Scaling Linear 2. The
Scaling Linear 1 function can be attached to a variable.
Objective
You wish to scale linearly a value from the PLC prior to the value being displayed on the TP or OP. Or you may wish to scale an input on the TP or OP
prior to the value being transferred to the PLC.
To configure

variable, configure the function you selected, Scaling Linear 1, to which the
following parameters apply:
Constant for the slope: a
Constant for the slope: b
Execution
A value, Y, is transferred from the PLC. The variable is updated, and the scaling function is triggered. The scaled value is displayed as the display value, X,
in the input/output field.
If the operator enters a value, X, on the TP or OP, the function is triggered. The
value is scaled and is then transferred to the PLC as the PLC value, Y.
Example
Let the value 512 (Y) on the PLC be the equivalent of the value 0,0 (X) on the
TP or OP and the value 2560 (Y) be the equivalent of 100,0 (X). This results in
the following values for the two constants a (slope) and b (offset):
Y=aX+b
512 = a 0,0 + b b = 512
2560 = a 100,0 + 512 a = 20,48
Parameters
Constant for slope a,

Constant for the slope b
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-57
Scaling Linear 2
Usage
With this function values are scaled linearly. Values from the PLC are scaled
prior to being displayed on the TP or OP. Inputs on the TP or OP are scaled
prior to the values being transferred to the PLC.
Scaling formula: Y = a X + b.
The Scaling Linear 2 function is the inverse function of Scaling Linear 1. The
Scaling Linear 2 function may be assigned to a variable.
Objective
You wish to scale linearly a value from the PLC prior to the value being displayed on the TP or OP. Or you may wish to scale an input on the TP or OP
To configure

variable, configure the function you selected, Scaling Linear 2, to which the
Execution
A value, X, is transferred from the PLC. The variable is updated, and the scaling function is triggered. The scaled value is displayed as the display value, Y,
If the operator enters a value, Y, on the TP or OP, the function is triggered. The
value is scaled and is then transferred to the PLC as the PLC value, X.
Example
Let the value 512 (X) on the PLC be the equivalent of the value 0,0 (Y) on the
TP or OP and the value 2560 (X) be the equivalent of 100,0 (Y). This results in
the following values for the two constants a (slope) and b (offset):
Y=aX+b
0,0 = a 512 + b
100,0 = a 2560 + b
a = 0,048828125 and b = 25
Parameters

A-58
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Scaling Square 1
Usage
With this function values are scaled quadratically. Values from the PLC are
scaled prior to being displayed on the TP or OP. Inputs on the TP or OP are
scaled prior to the values being transferred to the PLC.
Scaling formula: Y = a X^2 + b X + c.
The Scaling Square 1 function is the inverse function of Scaling Square 2. The
Scaling Square 1 function can be attached to a variable.
Objective
You wish to scale quadratically a value from the PLC prior to the value being
displayed on the TP or OP. Or you may wish to scale an input on the TP or OP
To configure

variable, configure the function you selected, Scaling Square 1, to which the
Constant for the slope: c
Execution
A value, Y, is transferred from the PLC. The variable is updated, and the scaling function is triggered. The scaled value is displayed as the display value, X,
If the operator enters a value, X, on the TP or OP, the function is triggered. The
value is scaled and is then transferred to the PLC as the PLC value, Y.
Example
Let the value 22 (Y) on the PLC be the equivalent of the value 0,0 (X) on the
TP or OP, the value 70 (Y) be the equivalent of 5,0 (X) and the value 250 (Y)
be the equivalent of 10,0 (X). This results in the following values for the three
constants a (slope), b (slope) and c (offset):
Y = a X^2 + b X + c
22 = a 0,0^2 + b 0,0 + c c = 22
70 = a 5,0^2 + b 5,0 + 22
250 = a 10,0^2 + b 10,0 + 22
a = 2,64 and b = 3,6
Parameters

Constant for the slope c
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-59
Scaling Square 2
Usage
With this function values are scaled quadratically. Values from the PLC are
scaled prior to being displayed on the TP or OP. Inputs on the TP or OP are
scaled prior to the values being transferred to the PLC.
Scaling formula: Y = a X^2 + b X + c.
The Scaling Square 2 function is the inverse function of Scaling Square 1. The
Scaling Square 2 function can be attached to a variable.
Objective
You wish to scale quadratically a value from the PLC prior to the value being
displayed on the TP or OP. Or you may wish to scale an input on the TP or OP
To configure

variable, configure the function you selected, Scaling Square 2, to which the
Constant for the slope: c
Execution
A value, X, is transferred from the PLC. The variable is updated, and the scaling function is triggered. The scaled value is displayed as the display value, Y,
If the operator enters a value, Y, on the TP or OP, the function is triggered. The
value is scaled and is then transferred to the PLC as the PLC value, X.
Example
Let the value 22 (X) on the PLC be the equivalent of the value 0,0 (Y) on the
TP or OP, the value 70 (X) be the equivalent of 5,0 (Y) and the value 250 (X)
be the equivalent of 10,0 (Y). This results in the following values for the three
constants a (slope), b (slope) and c (offset):
Y = a X^2 + b X + c
0,0 = a 22^2 + b 22 + c
5,0 = a 70^2 + b 70 + c
10,0 = a 250^2 + b 250 + c
a = 0,000335039, b = 0,134990253 and c = 2,8076267
Parameters
Constant for slope a

Constant for the slope c
A-60
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Variable: Value Minus/Plus
Usage
You can use this function to increment or decrement the value of a variable by
a constant amount.
Scaling formula: variable new = variable old " constant.
The Variable: Value Minus/Plus function may be assigned to a function key or
a button.
Objective
You wish to add or subtract a constant to or from the value of a variable by

means of a function key or a button.
To configure
Select the function key or button with which you wish to modify the variable
and assign it to the Variable: Value Minus/Plus function.
Define the following parameters:
Variable whose value you wish to modify
Signed constant to be added to the variable. The addition of a negative
value is the equivalent of a subtraction.
Under Conditions, set when you wish to have the function executed:
Press key
Release key
Repeat key (TPs only)
Execution
As soon as the configured execution condition is fulfilled, the variable is recalculated and used with its new value.
Parameters
Variable whose value you want to modify

Signed constant to be added to the variable (32768...+32767)
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
A-61
A-62
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
PLC Jobs
Description
PLC jobs can be used to trigger functions on the TP or OP for example
display screen
set date and time
modify general settings
A PLC job consists of four data words. The first data word contains the job
number. Up to three parameters are transferred to data words 2 through 4,
depending on the function. The basic structure of a PLC job is shown in
Figure B-1.
Address
1st word
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Right Byte (RB)
Job No.
2nd word
Parameter 1
3rd word
Parameter 2
4th word
Parameter 3
Figure B-1
List
Left Byte (LB)
Structure of a PLC Job
This section of the Appendix lists all the PLC jobs, and their parameters, that
are possible for the different TPs and OPs featuring a graphics display. The
column No. denotes the job number. Generally speaking, jobs can be initiated
by the PLC only when the TP or OP is in Online mode.
B-1
OP37
Blank Screen

TP37
TP27
Function
OP25
OP35
No.
Parameter 1
OP27
PLC Jobs
0: off
1: on
Parameters 2, 3
3

Print Screen
Parameters 1, 2, 3

Drive Port
Parameter 1
Port number:
1 through 8
1 through 16
(OP25/OP27/TP27)
(OP35/OP37/TP37)
Parameter 2
Keyboard number (not applicable to TPs):

LB:
1
RB:
0
Parameter 3
0: off
3: on

Set Relay
12
13
14
B-2
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
LB:
RB:
Parameter 3
0: off
3: on
FFH
FFH

Enable/Disable Message Logging

Parameter 1
0: off
1: on
Parameters 2, 3

Change Language
Parameter 1
0: 1st language
1: 2nd language
2: 3rd language
Parameters 2, 3

Set Time (BCD-Coded)

Parameter 1
LB:
RB:
Hours (0 through 23)
Parameter 2
LB:
RB:
Minutes
Seconds
Parameter 3
(0 through 59)
(0 through 59)
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
TP37
TP27
Set Date (BCD-Coded)

Parameter 1
LB:
RB:
Parameter 2
LB:
RB:
Parameter 3
LB:
OP37
15
OP35
Function
OP27
No.
OP25
PLC Jobs

Day of week
Day
Month
Year
(1 through 7: Sunday through Saturday)

(1..31)
(1 through 12)
21
Alarm Messages Display Type

Parameter 1
0: First (oldest message)
1: Last (latest message)
Parameters 2, 3

23
Set Password Level

Parameter 1
0..9
(0 = lowest password level; 9 = highest password level)
Parameters 2, 3

24
Password Logout
Parameters 1, 2, 3

37
Enable/Disable Overflow Warning for Event Messages

Parameter 1
0: off
1: on
Parameters 2, 3

38
Enable/Disable Overflow Warning for Alarm Messages

Parameter 1
0: off
1: on
Parameters 2, 3

41
Transfer Date/Time to PLC

Parameters 1, 2, 3
Too frequent loading of this job may lead to overloading. There should therefore be a
break of at least five seconds between two jobs.
42
Fetch LED Area from PLC

Parameter 1
Area pointer No:
Parameters 2, 3
1 through 8
Fetch Event Message Area from PLC

Parameter 1
Area pointer No:
Parameters 2, 3
1 through 8
43
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97

B-3
TP37
Fetch Alarm Message Area from PLC

Parameter 1
Area pointer No:
Parameters 2, 3
TP27
44
OP37
Function
OP35
No.
OP27
OP25
PLC Jobs

1 through 8
45
Fetch Acknowledgment Area from PLC

Parameter 1
Area pointer No:
1 through 8
Parameters 2, 3

47
Transfer LED Area Directly to OP

Parameter 1
LED assignment area number: 1 through 8
Parameter 2
LED assignment: 1st word
Parameter 3
LED assignment: 2nd word
Unlike job No. 42 (Fetch LED Area from PLC), the LED assignment is transferred
in this instance in the PLC job, thus enabling the LEDs to be driven more quickly.

The specified LED area must not be configured with more than 2 DW.
49
Delete Events Buffer

Parameters 1, 2, 3

50
Delete Alarms Buffer

Parameters 1, 2, 3

51
Select Screen
Parameter 1

Parameter 2
Parameter 31)
RB: Screen number
(1 through 255)
Field number
(1 through 255)
Output fields are not taken into account in the serial number.
69
Transfer Recipe Data Record from PLC to TP or OP

Parameter 1
Keyword 1
Parameter 2
Keyword 2
Parameter 3
Keyword 3

70
Transfer Recipe Data Record from TP or OP to PLC

Parameter 1
Keyword 1
Parameter 2
Keyword 2
Parameter 3
Keyword 3

72
Position Cursor on Current Screen

Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Field number
Parameter 3

(1 through 255)
1) OPs only
B-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Toolbars in ProTool
Button
Function
Key Combination
Description
General
New
CTRL + N
Create new configuration.
Open
CTRL + O
Open existing configuration.
Save
CTRL + S
Save active configuration.
Print
CTRL + P
Print active configuration.
Compile
CTRL + G
Translate active configuration into system

data format.
Download
CTRL + T
Download active configuration to system.
Cut
CTRL + X
Remove selection and write to Clipboard.
Copy
CTRL + C
Copy selection and write to Clipboard.
Paste
CTRL + V
Paste contents of Clipboard.
Help
Shift + F1
View help on clicked buttons, menus and

windows.
Underscore
Set underscore attribute.
Flashing
Set flashing attribute.
Italic
Set italic attribute.
Capitals
Set capitals attribute.
Style
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
C-1
Toolbars in ProTool
Button
Function
Messages
Field display mode
Description
Shift + F9
Switch field display mode between symbol

and WYSIWYG.
Text/information text
CTRL + I
Switch between text and information text.
Field
CTRL + F9
Insert new field or edit existing field.
Align selected fields with left edge.
Right align
Align selected fields with right edge.
Top align
Align selected fields with top edge.
Bottom align
Align selected fields with bottom edge.
Same horizontal
distance
Align selected fields to same horizontal

distance.
Alignment
Left align
Same vertical distance
Align selected fields to same vertical

distance.
Same width
Set selected fields to same width.
Same height
Set selected fields to same height.
To the back
Place selected element in the background.
To the front
Place selected element at front.
Display object in single-column list.
Multiple columns
Display object in multiple-column list.
Undo
CTRL + Z
Undoes the last action.
Project window
Single column
C-2
Key Combination
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Toolbars in ProTool
Button
Function
Selecting fields
Select
Key Combination
Description
Select fields.
Text
Create text.
Character Graphic
Create character graphic.
Graphic
Paste OLE objects.
Input/output
Create variable fields with numerical

representation.
Text or graphic list
Create variable fields with symbolic

representation (text or graphic).
Trend
Create trend graphics.
Bar
Create bar graph.
Button
Create buttons.
Set/Reset Bit
Buttons Set/Reset Bit Creating.
Select Screen
Buttons Select Screen Creating.
Light indicator
Buttons Light indicator Creating.
Zoom in
CTRL + +
Enlarge screen size.
Zoom out
CTRL +
Reduce screen size.
Display area
CTRL +
Display maximum display area.
Color ON/OFF
Switches the active screen from color to

monochrome.
Touch panel
Enable/disable touch panel.
Invisible buttons
Enable/disable display of invisible buttons.
Zoom
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
C-3
Toolbars in ProTool
C-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
System Limits for TPs and OPs Featuring

Graphics Displays
Object
Screens
Input/output fields
Trends
Text or graphic
g p lists
Graphic objects
Event messages,
g , alarm
messages
Text elements
Variables
Variable types per

configuration
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Elements
Limit
Total
Fields per screen
Process values for screen 1)
Samples in trend graphics per screen
Number of dynamic attributes
Total
Bit-triggered:
Samples (WORD) 1) 2)
Total
Entries per list
Total
Total
Variables
Variables per message
Recipe entries, information text, text
list entries
Total (WORD) 1) 3)
300
600
600 (OP25/OP27/TP27: 400)
2.000 (OP25/OP27/TP27: 1.000)
4,000
300
120
30,000 (OP25/OP27/TP27: 20,000)
500
255
1,000
2,000 each
5,000 each
8
30,000
SIMATIC S7
other PLCs
8,000
2,000
600 (OP25/OP27/TP27: 400)
Variables with Read Continuously

SIMATIC S5:
KF
KH, KM, KY, KT, KZ
DF
DH
KG
KC
SIMATIC S7:
CHAR, INT
BYTE, WORD, Timer, Counter
DINT
DWORD
REAL
BOOL
String
2,000
2,000
1,800
1,800
1,800
2,500 (10,000 chars max.)
8,000
8,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
8,000
8,000 (16,000 chars max.)
D-1
System Limits for TPs and OPs Featuring Graphics Displays
Object
Elements
Variable types per

configuration
SIMATIC 500/505:
+/ INT
INT
+/ DOUBLE
DOUBLE
REAL
BIT
ASCII
Maximum value of REAL Significant positions with REAL
andd DOUBLE
Calculation and display
Recipes
p
4)
Limit
2,000
2,000
1,800
1,800
1,800
2,500
2,500 (10,000 chars max.)
6
500,000
(when scaling trends and bar graphs)

Total
255
Data records per recipe
500
Total entries
5,000
Entries per recipe
3,000 (6,000 bytes max.)
SIMATIC S7-300/400
other PLCs
Indirect recipes (bytes)
500 (2,000 bytes max.)

190
1) Multiplication factor for variable type:

WORD, BYTE, BOOL 1 value
DWORD, REAL 2 values
STRING: 2 characters 1 value
2) Less 15 samples per trend. Equivalent of, for example, 300 trends with 85 samples each
(or 300 trends with 50 samples each for the OP25)
3) SIMATIC S7: Less 1 variable per 96 pattern trend samples (WORD)
SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC 500/505: Less 1 variable per 25 pattern trend samples (WORD)
4) Memory requirement
Floppy disk drive
Memory requirement = (number of recipes + 1) 512 + (number of data records data record
size)
Data record size = 60 bytes + data record length in bytes (multiple of 512)
With symbolism: plus 15 bytes per entry
Flash/memory module
Memory requirement = number of data records data record size
Data record size = 90 bytes + data record length in bytes
With symbolism: plus 15 bytes per entry
Multiplication factor for data record:
BYTE, BOOL 1 byte
WORD 2 bytes
DWORD, REAL 4 bytes
STRING: 1 character 1 byte
Note:
You obtain the length of a data record by adding to the offset of the last entry its length.
D-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Example of
SIMATIC S7
You use in your configuration
5,000 INT variables

1,000 DINT variables
700 BOOL variables and
300 pattern trends containing 80 samples each.
This results in the following balance (WORD):

Variables:
Trend samples:
5,000 + (2 1,000) + 700 + (300 80)/96 = 7,750

300 (80 + 15 ) = 28,500
The configuration is within the specified system limits.
Example of
SIMATIC S5
You use in your configuration

1500 KF variables
100 DF variables and
150 pattern trends containing 50 samples each.
This results in the following balance (WORD):
Variables:
Trend samples:
1,500 + (2 100) + (150 50)/25 = 2,000

150 (50 + 15) = 9,750
The configuration is within the specified system limits.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
D-3
D-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Siemens Worldwide
In this Appendix
In this appendix you will find a list of:
All cities in the Federal Republic of Germany with Siemens Sales Offices
and
All European and non-European Siemens Companies and Representatives

Siemens Sales
Offices in the
Federal Republic
of Germany
The following table lists all Siemens Sales Offices in the Federal Republic of
Germany.
Aachen
Kassel
Augsburg
Kempten/Allg.
Bayreuth
Kiel
Berlin
Laatzen
Bielefeld
Leipzig
Bonn
Lingen
Bremen
Magdeburg
Brunswick
Mainz
Chemnitz
Mannheim
Coblenz
Munich
Cologne
Mnster/Westf.
Constance
Nuremberg
Darmstadt
Osnabrck
Dortmund
Regensburg
Dresden
Rostock
Duisburg
Saarbrcken
Dsseldorf
Siegen
Erfurt
Stuttgart
Essen
Ulm
Frankfurt am Main
Wetzlar
Freiburg
Wilhelmshaven
Hamburg
Wuppertal
Heilbronn
Wrzburg
Karlsruhe
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
E-1
Siemens Worldwide
European
Companies and
Representatives
The following table lists all European Siemens Companies and

Representatives.
Austria
Finland
Siemens AG sterreich
Siemens Oy

Bregenz
Espoo, Helsinki
Graz
France
Innsbruck
Siemens S.A.
Linz
Siemens N. V.

Antwerp
Great Britain
Bosnia-Herzegovina
Siemens plc
Salzburg
Vienna
Belgium
Siemens S.A.
Brussels
Lige
Generalexport Predstavnistvo Sarajevo
Sarajevo
Bulgaria
Siemens AG, Bulgaria Representative
Sofia
Croatia
Siemens d. o. o.
Zagreb
Cyprus
GEVO Ltd.
or
Jolali Ltd.
Nicosia
Czech Republic
Siemens AG

Haguenau
Lille, Seclin
Lyon, Caluire-et-Cuire
Marseille
Metz
Paris, Saint-Denis
Strasbourg
Toulouse
Birmingham, Walsall
Bristol, Clevedon
Congleton
Edinburgh
Glasgow
Leeds
Liverpool
London, Sunbury-on-Thames
Manchester
Newcastle
Greece
Siemens A.E.
Athens, Amaroussio
Thessaloniki
Hungaria
Brno
Mlad Boleslav
Prague
Siemens Kft
Denmark
Reykjavik
Siemens A/S
Copenhagen, Ballerup
Budapest
Iceland
Smith & Norland H/F
Ireland
Siemens Ltd.
Dublin
E-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Siemens Worldwide
Italy
Romania
Siemens S.p.A.
Siemens birou de consultatii tehnice

Bari
Bukarest
Bologna
Russia
Brescia
Siemens AG
Casoria
or
Florence
Mosmatic
Genoa
Moscow
Milan
Siemens AG
Padua
Ekaterinburg
Rome
Turin
Luxemburg
Siemens S.A.
Luxemburg
Malta
J. R. Darmanin & Co. Ltd.
Valletta
Netherlands
Siemens Nederland N.V.
The Hague
Rijswijk
Norway
Siemens A/S

Bergen
Oslo
Stavanger
Trondheim
Poland
Siemens GmbH
Gdansk-Letnica
Katowice
Warsaw
Portugal
Siemens S.A.

Slovak Republic
Siemens AG
Bratislava
Slovenia
Siemens d. o. o.
Ljubljana
Spain
Siemens S.A.

Barcelona
Bilbao
Gijn
Granada
La Corua
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria
Len
Madrid
Mlaga
Murcia
Palma de Mallorca
Pamplona
Sevilla
Valencia
Valladolid
Vigo
Zaragoza
Albufeira
Sweden
Combra
Siemens AB
Lisbon, Amadora
Matosinhos
Porto
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97

Gteborg
Jnkping
Malm
Sundsvall
Upplands Vsby, Stockholm
E-3
Siemens Worldwide
Switzerland
Turkey
Siemens-Albis AG
SIMKO
Basel
Bern
Zrich

Siemens-Albis S.A.
Renens, Lausanne
Adana
Ankara
Bursa
Istanbul
Izmir
Samsun
Ukraine
Siemens AG
Kiev
Non-European
Companies and
Representatives
The following table lists all non-European Siemens Companies and

Representatives of Siemens AG.
Africa
The following table lists all Siemens Companies and Representatives of

Siemens AG in Africa.
Algeria
Morocco
Siemens Bureau dAlger
SETEL
Alger
Socit Electrotechnique et de Tlcommunications S.A.
Angola
Casablanca
TECNIDATA
Mozambique
Luanda
Siemens Liaison Office
Bophuthatswana
Maputo
Siemens Ltd.
Namibia
Mafekeng
Siemens (Pty.) Ltd.
Egypt
Windhoek
Siemens Technical Office
Nigeria
Cairo-Mohandessin
Electro Technologies Nigeria Ltd. (ELTEC)
Siemens Technical Office
Lagos
Alexandria
EGEMAC S.A.E.
Cairo-Mattaria
Rwanda
Etablissement Rwandais
Kigali
Ethiopia
Sambia
Addis Electrical Engineering Ltd.
Electrical Maintenance Lusaka Ltd.
Addis Abeba
Lusaka
Ivory Coast
Simbabwe
Siemens AG
Electro Technologies Corporation (Pvt.) Ltd. (ETC)
Abidjan
Harare
Libya
Siemens AG, Branch Libya
Tripoli
E-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Siemens Worldwide
South Africa
Swaziland
Siemens Ltd.
Siemens (Pty.) Ltd.

Cape Town
Mbabane
Durban
Tanzania
Johannesburg
Tanzania Electrical Services Ltd.
Middelburg
Dar-es-Salaam
Newcastle
Tunesia
Port Elizabeth
Sitelec S.A.
Pretoria
Tunis
Sudan
Zaire
National Electrical & Commercial Company (NECC)
Khartoum
America
SOFAMATEL S.P.R.L.
Kinshasa

Siemens AG in America.
Argentina
Canada
Siemens S.A.
Siemens Electric Ltd.

Buenos Aires
Montreal, Qubec
Toronto
Crdoba
Chile
Mendoza
INGELSAC
Rosario
Santiago de Chile
Baha Blanca
Bolivia
Colombia
Sociedad Comercial Industrial Hansa Ltda.
Siemens S.A.
La Paz
Belm

Belo Horizonte
Costa Rica
Brasilia
Siemens S.A.
Campinas
Panama
San Jos
Brazil
Siemens S.A.

Curitiba
Fortaleza
Prto Alegre
Recife
Rio de Janeiro
Salvador de Bahia
So Paulo
Vitria
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Barranquilla
Bogot
Cali
Medelln
Cuba
Respresentacin
Consult iva EUMEDA
La Habana
Ecuador
Siemens S.A.
Quito
E-5
Siemens Worldwide
El Salvador
Paraguay
Siemens S.A.
Rieder & Cia. S.A.C.I.
San Salvador
Asuncin
Guatemala
Peru
Siemens S.A.
Siemsa
Ciudad de Guatemala
Lima
Honduras
United States of America
Representaciones Electroindustriales S de R.L. Relectro
Siemens Industrial Automation Inc.
Tegucigalpa
Automation Division
Alpharetta, GA
Mexico
Numeric Motion Control
Siemens S.A. de CV
Elk Grove Village, Illinois

Culiacn
Uruguay
Gmez Palacio
Conatel S.A.
Guadalajara
Montevideo
Len
Venezuela
Mxico, D.F.
Monterrey
Puebla
Nicaragua
Siemens S.A.
Caracas
Valencia
Siemens S.A.
Managua
Asia

Siemens AG in Asia.
Bahrain
India
Transitec Gulf
Siemens Limited
Manama

Bangladesh
Siemens Bangladesh Ltd.
Dhaka
Brunei
Brunei Darussalam
Hong Kong
Siemens Ltd.
Hong Kong
Ahmedabad
Bangalore
Bombay
Calcutta
Madras
New Delhi
Secnderabad
Indonesia
P.T. Siemens Indonesia, P.T. Siemens Dian-Grana
Elektrika, Representative Siemens AG
Jakarta
E-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Siemens Worldwide
Iraq
Peoples Republic of China
Samhiry Bros. Co. Limited
Siemens AG Representation
or
Baghdad
Beijing
Guangzhou
Shanghai
Iran
Philippine Islands
Siemens S.S.K.
Maschinen & Technik Inc. (MATEC)
Teheran
Manila
Japan
Qatar
Siemens K.K.
Trags Electrical Engineering and Air Conditioning Co.
Tokyo
Doha
Korea
Saudi Arabia
Siemens Ltd.
Arabia Electric Ltd. (Equipment)
Changwon
Seoul
Ulsan
Al-Khobar
Jeddah
Riyadh
Kuwait
Singapore
National & German Electrical and Electronic Services

Co. (NGEECO)
Siemens (Pte.) Ltd.
Siemens AG (Iraq Branch)
Kuwait, Arabia
Singapore
Sri Lanka
Lebanon
Dimo Limited
Ets. F.A. Kettaneh S.A.
Colombo
Beirut
Syria
Malaysia
Siemens AG, Branch (A.S.T.E.)
Siemens Electrical Engineering Sdn. Bhd.
Damascus
Kuala Lumpur
Taiwan
Nepal
Siemens Ltd., TELEUNION Engineering Ltd.
Amatya Enterprises (Pvt.) Ltd.
or
Kathmandu
TAI Engineering Co., Ltd.
Waleed Associates
Taichung
Taipei
Muscat
Thailand
Pakistan
Berti Jucker Co. Ltd.
Siemens Pakistan Engineering Co., Ltd.
Bangkok
Oman

Islamabad
Karachi
Lahore
Peshawar
Quetta
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
E-7
Siemens Worldwide
United Arab Emirates
Vietnam
Electro Mechanical Co.
OAV Representative Office
or
Hanoi
Siemens Resident Engineers
Yemen (Arab. Republic)
Abu Dhabi
Tihama Tractors & Engineering Co., Ltd.
Scientechnic
or
or
Sanaa
Dubai
Australia

Siemens AG in Australia
Australia
New Zealand
Siemens Ltd.
Siemens Ltd.

Auckland
Wellington
E-8
Adelaide
Brisbane
Melbourne
Perth
Sydney
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Glossary
A
Alarm message
Calls attention to high-priority operating states and has therefore to be

acknowledged.
Alarm time
Time between the arrival and departure of an alarm message.
Area pointer
Required for data exchange between the TP or OP and the PLC. It contains
information concerning the length and size of data areas on the PLC.
Arrival of a
message
The point in time at which a message is issued by the PLC, TP or OP.
Automation
systems
PLCs of the SIMATIC S7 series for example, SIMATIC S7-200/300/400)
B
Blanking
Automatic turn-off of display back lighting.
Boot
A load operation which transfers the operating system to working memory on

the TP or OP.
Button
Touch-sensitive area on the screen of a Touch Panel with configurable

functionality. Buttons replace, among others, the system and function keys on a
TP .
C
Configuration
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Definition of system-specific basic settings, messages and screens using the

ProTool configuration software.
Glossary-1
Glossary
D
Departure of a
message
The point in time at which a message is withdrawn by the PLC.
Direct keys
Direct keys enable quick key operations on the TP or OP without communication-related delay. With direct keys you can depending on your configuration
control the ports of the optional direct-key modules or set bits in the I/O area
of a SIMATIC S7.
Display function
Function causing the contents of the display to be modified for example,

Display Message Level, Display Alarm Buffer And Display Process Screen.
Download mode
Operating mode of the TP or OP during which data are downloaded from the
PU or PC to the TP or OP.
Duration of display
The time between the arrival and departure of a message.
E
Event message
Draws attention to specific operating states on machines or systems connected

to the PLC.
F
Field
Reserved area in configured and non-configurable text for the output and/or
input of values.
Flash memory
Programmable memory which can quickly be deleted and then re-written.
I
Information text
Additional, configurable information for messages, screens, screen entries and

list boxes.
L
Light indicator
Glossary-2
Non-sensitive button as a display element on a Touch Panel. Light indicators

signal the state of a defined bit by a color change or flashing text.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Glossary
M
Message log
Printout of alarm messages and event messages simultaneously with their output to the display.
Message level
Operating level of the TP or OP, on which triggered messages are displayed.
N
Normal mode
Operating mode of the TP or OP during which messages can be displayed and

screens can be controlled by the operator.
O
Output field
Field for displaying a setpoint.
P
Password,
Password level
To control a protected function, a password of a specific password level has to

be entered. The password level determines the privileges of the operator. The
requisite password level can be configured, 0 being the lowest level and 9 the
highest.
PLC
Generic term for devices and systems with which the TP communicates for
example, SIMATIC S5/S7 or PCs).
PLCs
PLCs of the SIMATIC S5 series for example, AG S5-115U/135U)
PLC job
Function triggered by the PLC.
Printout
Output of the contents of the display to an attached printer.
Process screen
Representation of process values and process sequences in the form of screens,

which may contain graphics, pieces of text and values.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Glossary-3
Glossary
S
Screen
Form of displaying logically associated process data which may be shown

collectively on the TP or OP and modified individually.
Screen entry
Element of a screen, consisting of the entry number, text and variables.
Screen level
Working level of the TP or OP, on which screens can be monitored and

operated.
Selection field
Field for the value setting of a parameter (one value can be selected as the
default value).
Soft key
Key with variable meaning, depending on the screen entry displayed.
Startup test
Checks the state of the CPU and memories every time the power supply
voltage is turned on.
System message
Calls attention to internal states on the TP or OP and on the PLC.
T
Touch panel
Glossary-4
An operator panel without a keyboard. A touch panel is operated by means of

its touch-sensitive screen.
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Index
Numbers
3-D effect, Button, 6-35
A
Acknowledgement, 7-7
Acknowledgement area, 7-7
Acknowledgement groups, 7-8
Adjust Contrast, A-18
Alarm acknowledgement area, Number, 7-2
Alarm acknowledgement OP, 11-3
Alarm acknowledgment PLC, 11-3
Alarm message area, 7-2
Alarm message window, 4-13
Alarm messages, 4-18, 4-25, 7-1, 7-7, 11-3
Alarm Messages Display Type, B-3
Alarms
Delete Buffer, A-54
Display First/Last, A-56
ANSI Code, 10-3
Area pointer, 7-7
Area pointers, 4-3, 11-3
Printing, 13-1
Screen number, 6-41
Areas, for the display, 4-11
Array variable, 5-2, 8-4
Array variables, 6-30
ASCII printing, A-37
Asian character sets, 10-1
Assigning function keys, 4-24
Assigning message area and message number,
7-3
Attribute window, 7-1
Attributes, 6-2, 6-19
Dynamic, 6-34
Automatic Graphics Printing, A-37
Axes, Trend graphic, 6-22
B
Back up, Pattern trend, 6-30
Background color, 6-5
Button, 6-35
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Backup, 14-7
Backup file, 14-8
Backup/Restore Module, A-4
Bar, Interrupted trend plotting, 6-28
Bar graphs, 6-20
Basic area, 4-12, 6-2
Baud rate, 12-2
Bit number, 7-3, 15-11
Bitmap, Editing, 6-9
Bitmap graphic, 14-5
Blank backlighting, A-12
Blank Screen, A-12, B-2
Border color, Button, 6-35
Branching to other dialog boxes, 3-8
Buffer, 6-29
Buffer Overflow, A-52
Button, 6-2, 6-32, 6-33
Featuring Freely Definable Function, 6-33
Fixed function, 6-37
Light indicator, 6-38
Select Screen, 6-38
Set/Reset Bit, 6-37
Buttons, Toolbar, C-1
C
Cable set, 12-2
Calling ProTool, with STEP 7 integration, 4-6
Cascaded areas, 4-15
CD-ROM, 2-1
Change, Set/Reset Bit, 6-37
Change AM Page/Buffer, A-53
Change EM Page/Buffer, A-42
Change Language, B-2
Change of color, 5-4
Change of graphic, 6-17
Chapters, 13-1
Character graphic, 6-7
Chinese, 10-1, 10-5
Clipboard, 4-20
Clock Pulse, 6-26
Color, Button, 6-35
Color availability, 6-5
Index-1
Index
Color change, 5-4, 6-38

Button, 6-35
Colors, 6-5
Combined input and output, 6-12
Communication areas, 4-3, 15-1
Compile, 4-1, 4-4, 12-1
Components of a screen, 6-1
Conditions, 9-3
Fields, 9-4
Function keys, 9-4
Screens, 9-4
Variable, 9-4
with functions, 9-3
Configuration
Compile, 4-4
Compiling, 12-1
Creating, 4-3
Download, 4-4
Downloading, 12-2
Managing, 14-1
Name, 14-2
on local drive, 16-1
Overwriting, 4-5
Printing, 13-1
Procedure, 4-2, 4-3
Configuration data, 1-2
Managing, 12-5
Configuration language, 10-1
Configuration management, Management, 14-6
Configuration phase, 1-2
Configuration procedure, 4-3
Configuration steps, 4-2
Configure
Direct keys, 6-40
in different languages, 10-1
in several languages, 10-2
Configuring, 1-1
with ProTool, 4-1
Consistency check, 12-1
Control, 6-19
Control and acknowledgement bits, 15-3
Control variable, 6-19
Conversion, When copying, 4-22
Convert, 4-1
Coordinate axes, 6-22
Copied items, 4-21
Copy, 4-20
Clipboard, 4-20
Messages, 7-10
Copy options, 4-20
Copying to other projects, 4-20
Index-2
Cover design, 13-2

CPU, 2-1
Create, Recipe, 8-11
Creating graphics, 6-8
Cross-reference, 3-6
Cut, 4-20
Cyrillic, 10-1
Czech, 10-5
D
Danish, 10-5
Data area, Time, 15-7
Data areas, 4-3, 11-3
Date, 15-7
Screen number area, 6-41
System keyboard assignment, 15-9
Data mailbox, 8-6, 11-3
Data record, 8-1
Creating, 8-7, 8-15
Downloading, 8-7, 8-16
Downloading by PLC job, 8-8
Name, 8-4
Data Record OP > PLC, B-4
Data Record PLC > OP, B-4
Data record transfer, synchronization, 15-5
Data records
Memory requirement, 12-6
Sorting, 8-15
Data structure, 8-1
Date, 9-8
Date and Time, A-34
Date Display/Edit, A-35
Date format, 11-1
Decimals, 5-5
of timers, 5-8
Default printer, 11-2
Define initial values, of variables, 5-4
Defining addresses, of variables, 5-2
Degree of copying, 4-22
Delete Alarms Buffer, B-4
Delete Events Buffer, B-4
Description of Functions, A-1
Device type, 4-1, 4-3
Dialog box, 3-8
Direct Key, A-25
Direct key module, 6-39
Direct Keys, TP, 6-39
Directly, Write, 5-3
Directories, 14-2
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Index
Display, 4-1, 6-13

Dynamic, 6-15
Information, 3-6
Partition, 4-11
Partitioning, 4-3
Display Alarms, A-55
Display control, Using variables, 5-10
Display element, Light indicator, 6-38
Display Events, A-41
Display Information Text, A-17
Display last message, 7-8
Display Messages, A-47
Display options, 7-8
Display partitioning, 4-11
Display type, 6-36
Displaying timers, 5-8
Displaying Variable Types on the TP or OP, 5-6
Download, 3-6, 4-1, 4-4, 12-1
Baud rate, 12-2
Help with problems, 12-7
Mode, 12-2, 12-3
Download methods, 12-2
Download phase, 1-2
Download type, 8-7
Download update, 12-6
Downloading, 12-2
Drive Port, B-2
Driver, Selecting, 4-3
Driver parameters, 11-2
Driving port, Direct key module, 6-39
Dummy screen, 4-23
Dutch, 10-5
Dynamic
Screen components, 6-1
Set/Reset Bit, 6-37
Dynamic attributes, 5-10, 6-19, 6-38
Button, 6-34
Dynamic color modification, 6-19
Dynamic display, 4-19, 6-15
Dynamic display modification, 6-19
Dynamic graphics, 6-17, 6-36
Dynamic position, 4-13
Dynamic Screen Selection 1, A-9
Dynamic text, 6-16, 6-36
E
East European languages, 10-1
Edit
Bitmap, 6-9
Menu, 3-4
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Editors, 4-16
Menu, 3-4
Enable/Disable Acoustic Signal, A-19
English, 10-5
Entry name, 8-2
Environment variable, 16-2
Escape sequence, Graphics printing, 11-2
Event message area, 7-2, 7-3
Event message window, 4-13, 7-5
Event messages, 4-18, 4-25, 7-1, 7-5, 11-3
Event Window, A-43
Events, 7-1
Events Delete Buffer, A-45
Example configurations, 14-2
Export, Messages, 7-11
F
Fetch Acknowledgement Area, B-4
Fetch Alarm Message Area, B-4
Fetch Event Message Area, B-3
Fetch LED Area, B-3
Field, 6-3
Hide, 6-20
Move, 3-1
Zoom in, 3-1
Zoom out, 3-1
Field length, 6-13
Field type, 6-3, 6-13
File, Menu, 3-4
File format, 14-5, 14-6
File structure, 14-1
Filter, Messages, A-49
Filtering messages, A-49
Find, File, 14-7
Finnish, 10-5
Firmware, 2-2, 12-1, 12-5, 14-1
Fixed window, 4-12, 6-2
Flash, Button, 6-34
Flash memory, 12-5
Flashing, 6-38
Flashing fields, 6-19
Fonts, 6-6, 10-2, 11-3, 14-1
Footers and headers, 13-2
Foreground color, 6-5
Button, 6-35
Format, 14-6
for text or graphic lists, 6-15
French, 10-5
Function instead of PLC job, 8-8
Function key, 6-2
Assigning, 4-24
Index-3
Index
Function key assignment, 15-10

Function keyboard, 11-3
Function keypad, 1-1
Function keys
Global assignment, 4-24
Local assignment, 4-24
Functions, 5-5, 9-1, 11-1, 14-1
Adjust Contrast, A-18
Alarms Delete Buffer, A-54
Alarms Display First/Last, A-56
Backup/Restore Module, A-4
Blank Screen, A-12
Buffer Overflow, A-52
Button, 6-34, 9-3
Change AM Page/Buffer, A-53
Change EM Page/Buffer, A-42
Conditions, 9-3
DAT > OP/PLC, 8-8
Date and Time, A-34
Date Display/Edit, A-35
Direct Key, A-25
Display Alarms, A-55
Display Events, A-41
Display Information Text, A-17
Display Messages, A-47
Enable/Disable Acoustic Signal, A-19
Event Window, A-43
Events Delete Buffer, A-45
Fields, 9-3
Function key, 9-3
Graphics Mode with Print Screen List, A-39
Initialize Bit in Startup, A-31
Language, A-15
Message Filter, A-49
Message Log ON/OFF, A-46
Mode, A-6
Overview, A-2
PLC > OP/DAT, 8-8
Print Screen List, A-38
PROFIBUS Screen Number, A-27
Reset Bit, A-29
Reset Bit in Word, A-22
Reset BOOL Variable , A-33
Scaling Linear 1, A-57
Scaling Square 1, A-59
Screen, 9-3
Scroll DOWN, A-14
Index-4
Scroll UP, A-13

Select Previous Screen, A-11
Select Screen, A-8
Set Bit, A-28
Set Bit in Word, A-21
Set Bit when Key is Pressed, A-24
Set BOOL Variable, A-32
Set/Reset Bit, A-30
Set/Reset Bit in Word, A-23
Start/Stop Print Screen, A-40
Time Display/Edit, A-36
Touch Calibration, A-20
Variable, 9-3
Variable: Value Minus/Plus, A-61
G
German, 10-5
Global assignment, 4-24
Global functions, 9-5
Global variables, 5-1
Graphic
Dynamic, 6-36
Representation in ProTool, 6-8
Static, 6-36
Graphic control characters, Printer, 11-2
Graphic list, 6-15, 6-36
Graphic symbol, 6-12
Graphics, 4-19, 6-8
Color changes, 6-15
Creating, 6-8
Distortion-free creation, 6-10
Embedding, 6-9
Setting size, 6-10
Graphics library, 14-5
Graphics Mode with Print Screen List, A-39
Graphics Printing, A-37
Gray values, TP/OP monochrome, 6-5
Greek, 10-1, 10-5
Group acknowledgement, 7-8
Guide lines, 6-22
H
Hard disk, 2-1
Hardware, 12-1
Headers and footers, 13-2
Help, 2-3, 3-3
Menu, 3-5
Help functions, 3-6
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Index
Hide, 5-10
Field, 6-20
Trend graphics, 6-23
High-speed direct keys, 6-39
Hungarian, 10-5
I
Icon, 4-13, 6-2
Identification
Data record, 8-4
Recipe, 8-4
Identifications, 8-4
Idle Time, Blank Screen, A-12
Import, Messages, 7-11
Index variable, 5-12, 6-23, 6-24
Information in the status bar, 3-6
Information text, 4-1, 7-4
Initial download, 12-6
Initialisations, 9-5
Initialize Bit in Startup, A-31
Input field, 5-4, 6-12
Input/output, 6-12
Settings, 6-12
Symbolic display, 6-15
Input/output field, 6-12
Display, 6-13
Field length, 6-13
Field type, 6-13
Usage, 6-13
Inserting new disk, Backup and Restore, 14-8
Installation, 2-1
Language, 2-1
Options, 2-2
STEP 7 integration, 2-1
Interface DB, 11-3
Interface parameters, Printer, 11-2
Interrupt, Trend plotting, 6-28
Introduction, 1-1
Invisible button, 6-35
Italian, 10-5
Key combinations, 12-2, C-1

Keyboard
Assignment
System keyboard, 15-9
Communication bit
Number, B-2
Keyboard assignment, 15-8
Languagedependent, 10-3
Keys, 1-1
L
Label, Button, 6-36
Language, A-15
Installing, 2-1
Language assignment, 11-2
Language-dependent font, 6-6, 10-2
Languages, 10-1
Adding, 10-5
Selecting, 2-1
LED, assignment, 15-11
LED assignment, 11-3, 15-8
Bit number, 15-11
LEDs, Functions, 15-11
Life bit, 15-4
Light indicator, 6-34, 6-38
Light indicators, 5-10
Limit value lines, 6-22
Limit value variable, 5-4
Limit values, 5-4, 5-11
Timers, 5-9
Line characters, 6-7
Load and save optimization, 16-1
Local, Variables, 5-1
Local assignment, 4-24
Local variables, 5-11
Log on, 14-4
Lower limit value, 5-4
J
Job mailbox, 15-6
K
Key assignment, function keyboard assignment,
15-10
Key combination, for fine tuning, 3-1
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
M
Main memory, 2-1
Main menu items, 3-4
Managing configurations, 14-6
Managing your configuration, 12-5, 14-1
Memory, Hard disk, 2-1
Memory card, 12-5
Index-5
Index
Memory Requirements, 3-6

Memory requirements, 11-2
Menu
Edit, 3-4
Editors!, 3-4
File, 3-4
Help, 3-5
Messages, 3-5
Options, 3-4
Screen, 3-5
System, 3-4
Window, 3-5
Menu bar, 3-4
Menu items
Editor-dependent, 3-5
Main menu, 3-4
Message areas, 7-2
Message buffer, 7-2
Message indicator, 4-13
Message line, 4-13, 7-5
Message Log ON/OFF, A-46
Message logging ON/OFF, B-2
Message number, 7-2, 7-3
Message printout, 7-1
Message priority, 7-2
Messages, 1-1, 7-1, 9-3, 9-4, 14-4
Copying, 7-10
Exporting and importing, 7-11
Menu, 3-5
Settings, 11-1
Mode, A-6
Monochrome, 6-4
Mouse, working without mouse, 3-1
MPI address setting, 12-4
MPI network configuration, 12-2
Multiple selections, 4-20
Multiplex variable, 6-34, 6-36
Multiplexing, 5-12
Trend variables, 6-24
Trends, 6-23
N
Norwegian, 10-5
Number area, 6-41
Index-6
O
Object, Copy, 4-20
Object types, 1-2, 4-1, 4-17
Objects, 1-2, 4-2, 4-3, 4-25, 9-1
Online, Updating Variables, 5-3
Online Help, 2-3, 3-3
Menu, 3-5
OP Acknowledgement, 7-7
OP language
Changing, 10-4
Removing, 10-4
Select, 10-4
Setting, 10-4
OP mode, 15-4
OP startup, 15-4
OP Type, 4-3
Open
Configuration, 3-2
Editor, 3-2
Optimization, 16-1
Option, hide, 5-10
Optional functions, 2-2
Optional PLC drivers, 2-2
Options, 2-2
Menu, 3-4
Output field, 5-4, 6-12
Overall reset
OP, 12-2
TP, 12-2
Overflow warning, 7-2, B-3
Overlap, Buttons, 6-32
Overwriting, configuration, 4-5
P
Page margins, 13-2
Page printing, 13-2
Parameters, DAT > OP/PLC function, 8-9
Partition, Display, 4-11
Partitioning the display, 4-3
Password, 11-1, 14-4
Password level, 6-13, 6-36
Password Logout, B-3
Paste, 4-20
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Index
Pattern trends, 6-22, 6-29

Back up/restore, 6-30
Trigger, 6-29
PLC, 4-25, 11-2
Define, 5-2
PLC Acknowledgement, 7-7
PLC job
15, 9-8
Alarm Messages Display Type, B-3
Blank Screen, B-2
Change Language, B-2
Data Record OP > PLC, B-4
Data Record PLC > OP, B-4
Delete Alarms Buffer, B-4
Delete Events Buffer, B-4
Drive Port, B-2
Fetch Acknowledgement Area, B-4
Fetch Alarm Message Area, B-4
Fetch Event Message Area, B-3
Fetch LED Area, B-3
Message logging ON/OFF, B-2
Overflow Warning ON/OFF, B-3
Password Logout, B-3
Position Cursor on Current Screen, B-4
Print Screen, B-2
Select Screen, B-4
Set Date, B-3
Set Password Level, B-3
Set Time, B-2
Transfer Date/Time, B-3
PLC Jobs, B-1
PLC jobs, 69 and 70, 8-8
PLC program, 14-2
Polish, 10-5
Polling time, 5-3
LED assignment, 15-11
Optimizing, 16-1
Port, Direct key module, 6-39, 7-2
Port number, B-2
Portuguese, 10-5
Position Cursor on Current Screen, B-4
Prefix, 3-4
Preview, 13-2
Preview window, button, 6-36
Print, 6-4
Configuration, 13-1
Reports, 13-2
Print initiation, 13-1
Print Screen, B-2
Print Screen List, A-38
Printer, 11-2
Printer options, 13-1
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Printer parameters, 14-4

Printer type, 11-2
Printing
Cover, 13-2
Separate pages, 13-2
Printout, 7-1
Priority
Messages, 7-2
Screen areas, 4-15
Procedure for configuring, 4-2
Process control phase, 1-2
PROFIBUS direct keys, 6-39
PROFIBUS Screen Number, A-27
PROFIBUS screen number, 6-40
Project information, 3-6
Project Manager, 14-6
Project window, 3-4, 4-20
Proportional type, 6-6
ProTool, 1-1
Installing, 2-1
Uninstalling, 2-3
ProTools user interface, setting, 3-7
PU cable, 12-2
R
RAM, 12-5
Read, Continuously, 5-3
Read Continuously, A-21, A-22, A-23, A-24
Read continuously, 5-3
Recipe, 4-26
Definition, 8-1
Identifications, 8-4
Set, 8-6
Recipes, 4-19
Reference Text, 6-4
Reference text
Messages menu, 3-7
Screen menu, 3-7
Relay, 7-2
Set, B-2
Remaining buffer space, 7-2
Remedies for download problems, 12-7
Renaming, when copying, 4-20
Repeat function, 6-34
Repetition of function, 6-34
Report, 13-1
Create, 13-2
Define, 13-2
Modifying, 13-2
Reset, Bit, 6-37
Index-7
Index
Reset Bit, A-29

Reset Bit in Word, A-22
Reset BOOL Variable, A-33
Restore, 14-7, A-4
Pattern trend, 6-30
RS232, Printer interface, 11-2
Russian, 10-5
S
Scale, of trends and bar graphs, 5-4
Scope of Supply, 14-2
Screen, 1-1, 4-17, 4-26, 6-1
Attributes, 6-2
Menu, 3-5
Reference text, 6-4
Select, 6-2
Surface, 6-3
Screen editor, 6-1
Screen number, 6-40, 6-41
Data area, 11-3
Screen partitioning, Touch panels, 6-32
Screen/Keys, 11-1
Screens
Fields, 6-3
Monochrome, 6-4
Print, 6-4
Size/Position, 6-4
Zoom, 6-4
Scroll DOWN , A-14
Scroll UP , A-13
Search criteria, 14-6
Select
Language, 2-1
Screen, dynamic, A-9, A-10
Screen, previous, A-11
Select Previous Screen, A-11
Select Screen, 6-38, A-8, B-4
Selecting, screen, A-8
Separate-page printing, 13-2
Servers, Selected, 6-9
Set, Bit, 6-37
Set Bit, A-28
Set Bit in Word, A-21
Set Bit when Key is Pressed, A-24
Set BOOL Variable, A-32
Set communication driver, 4-3
Set Date, B-3
Index-8
Set day of week, 9-8

Set Password Level, B-3
Set PLC, 4-3
Set Time, B-2
Set/Reset Bit, A-30
Set/Reset bit, 6-37
Set/Reset Bit in Word, A-23
Settings, 11-1
for system, 11-1
Print, 13-2
ProTools user interface, 3-7
System, 14-4
Setup, 2-3
SHIFT, 15-8
Single acknowledgement, 7-8
Size/Position, 6-4
Soft key, 4-24, 6-2
Soft keys, Definition, 4-24
Sort, Data records, 8-15
Spanish, 10-5
Stand-alone, 4-9
Standard configuration, 8-5, 14-2
Standard report, 13-1
Standard screens, 8-5, 14-4
Standby message, 7-5
Start/Stop Print Screen, A-40
Static graphic, 6-36
Static screen components, 6-1
Static text, 6-36
Status bar, 3-6, 7-2
Status window, when copying, 4-21
STEP 7 integration, 4-6
Calling ProTool, 4-6
Integrating projects, 4-8
Selecting a PLC, 4-6
Updating, 4-8
Storage device, External, 12-5
Structure, Recipe, 8-6
Surface, 6-3
Swedish, 10-5
Switch buffer, 6-30
Symbol packages, 6-7
Symbol set, 6-6
Symbolic
Input/output, 6-12
Names, 4-16, 14-3
Symbolic display, 6-15
Synchronization, Downloading data records, 8-8
System, 11-1
Menu, 3-4
System files, 14-1
System key assignment, 15-9
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Index

System keypad, 1-1
System limits, D-1
System requirements, 2-1
System resources monitoring, 16-2
T
Text, 6-6
Dynamic, 6-36
Static, 6-36
Text list, 6-15, 6-36
Text or graphic list, Recipes, 8-5
Text or graphic lists, 4-19, 6-15, 6-36
Binary, 6-16
Bit, 6-16
Decimal, 6-15
Format, 6-15
Printing, 13-1
Text symbol, 6-12
Time, 9-8
Time and Date, A-34
Time base, of timers, 5-8
Time Display/Edit, A-36
Time format, 11-1
Timers, 5-8
Limit values, 5-9
SIMATIC S5, 5-8
SIMATIC S7, 5-8
Toolbar, 3-5, 6-4, C-1
Editor-dependent, 3-1
Touch, Button, 6-33
Touch Calibration, A-20
Touch element, 1-1
Touch grid, 6-32
Touch panel, 6-32
Touch panels, Button configuration, 6-33
Touch screen, 6-32
Transfer data records, 15-5
Transfer Date/Time, B-3
Trend graphics, 6-22
Hide, 6-23
Trend list, 6-22
Trend plotting interruption, 6-28
Trend request, 11-3
Trend request area, 6-26, 6-29
Trend transfer, 11-3
Trend transfer area, 6-26, 6-29
Trend types, 6-22
Trend variables, Multiplexing, 6-24
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97
Trends, 4-19, 4-26, 6-22, 6-26

Multiplexing, 6-23
Trigger, 6-26, 6-29
Trigger, 6-22, 6-26, 6-29
Trigger bit, 6-29
TTY, Printer interface, 11-2
TTY level, 12-2
Turkish, 10-5
Type, Button, 6-35
Typing mode, 6-39
U
Undo, 4-21
Uninstall, 2-3
Update time, 16-1
Update time optimization, 16-1
Update variable once, 5-3
Updating, of variables, 5-3
Upper limit value, 5-4
Usage, 6-13
User data areas, LED assignment, 15-11
User interface language, 10-1
User version, 11-3
User-specific symbol packages, 6-7
Using symbols, Recipes, 8-6
Using the STEP 7 Symbol Table, 5-15
V
V.24 level, 12-2
Variable type, 5-2
Variable: Value Minus/Plus, A-61
Variables, 4-1, 4-18, 5-1
Display on TP or OP, 5-6
Examples, 5-2
Functions, 5-5
Global, 5-1
in recipes, 8-2, 8-4
Limit values, 5-4
Local, 5-1
Polling time, 5-3
Read Continuously, 5-3
STEP 7 symbol table, 5-15
Write directly, 5-3
Write indirectly, 5-3
Version check, 11-3
View, 13-2
Visible button, 6-35
Index-9
Index
Window, Menu, 3-5

Working memory, 2-1, 16-2
Working with ProTool, 3-1
Working without mouse, 3-1
Write
Directly, 5-3
Indirectly, 5-3
Write indirectly, Variables, 5-3
Y axis, 6-22
Z
Zoom, 6-4
Zoom factor, 6-9
X
X axis, 6-22
Index-10
ProTool Users Guide

Release 10/97

Prot 4e

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Prot 4e

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Preface, Table of Contents

Working with ProTool

Configuring with ProTool

General Settings for the System

Compiling and Downloading a

Printing Your Configuration

Managing Your Configuration

General Communication Areas

SIMATIC is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

Editor and Publisher: AUT91

Copyright Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

Technical data subject to change.

The ProTool configuration software is used to configure operator panels

Note on the C7-626:

ProTool Users Guide

OP3, OP5, OP7, OP15, OP17

This documentation applies to TPs and OPs featuring

a detailed description of the different fields in the

ProTool Users Guide

Provides information on connecting the TDs, TPs

ProTool Users Guide

The drivers for connecting these PLCs reside on

configuring process diagnostics for specific systems

How the manual is

The ProTool Users Guide is organized into the following chapters:

Description of the data areas used by the TP or OP and

Tips on optimizing a configuration.

description of the editors available in ProTool

ProTool Users Guide

The following conventions are used in this manual:

Text which is displayed on the screen is shown as

Valid for ProTool versions up to and including 1.31.

+49-911 895-7000 (Help Desk)

+49-911 895-7001 (Help by Fax)

Mail box (BBS)1)

+49-911 895-7100 (SIMATIC Customer Support)

ProTool Users Guide

American National Standards Institute

Driver of the PU interface to the SIMATIC S5

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Central Processing Unit

Light Emitting Diode

Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7)

Object Linking and Embedding

Programmable Logic Control

Point to Point Interface (SIMATIC S7)

Random Access Memory (working memory)

ProTool Users Guide

Working with ProTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu Bar and Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting ProTools User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring with ProTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Procedure for Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Features of STEP 7 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Partitioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copying to and from the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assigning Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Settings for the Most Important Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Data Types on the TP or OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controlling the Display on the TP or OP by Means of Variables . . . . . . . .

Symbol Table in STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .